SCT7000 Derniere PDF

SERVICE MANUAL
Large Format Color Inkjet Printer
SC-T7000 series
SC-T5000 series
SC-T3000 series
SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SEIJ12008
Notice:
 All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
 The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
 All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly
appreciate being informed of them.
 The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. EPSON
disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright © 2012 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

COMMERCIAL PRINTER PRODUCT DEPT.

PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1) Personal injury and 2) Damage to equipment.
DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing
procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR
REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL
ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER
SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
4. WHEN DISASSEMBLING OR ASSEMBLING A PRODUCT, MAKE SURE TO WEAR GLOVES TO AVOID INJURY FROM METAL PARTS WITH
SHARP EDGES.
WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING
PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO
THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC
WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECOND-
SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.
6. WHEN AIR DUSTER IS USED ON THE REPAIR AND THE MAINTENANCE WORK, THE USE OF THE AIR DUSTER PRODUCTS CONTAINING
THE INFLAMMABLE GAS IS PROHIBITED.
7. MAKE SURE AN ANTIVIRUS SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON THE COMPUTER USED FOR SERVICE SUPPORT. BE SURE TO HAVE THE
LATEST VIRUS DEFINITION FILE FOR THE SOFTWARE.

About This Manual
About This Manual: This manual is made for the sole purpose of providing necessary information in order that a serviceperson qualified by Epson performs his / her appropriate
repair / maintenance for the applicable Epson’s products. You shall not use this manual out of this purpose.
This manual is Epson’s confidential information. When you use this manual, you shall hold it in strict confidence and shall not disclose to any third party without prior consent of
Epson.
The instructions and procedures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the
preceding page.
Manual Configuration
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix.
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product.
CHAPTER 2.TROUBLESHOOTING
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 3.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling the product.
CHAPTER 4.ADJUSTMENT
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.
CHAPTER 5.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epson-approved lubricants and
adhesives required for servicing the product.
CHAPTER 6.APPENDIX
Provides the following additional information for reference:
• Connectors
• Panel Menu Maps
• ASP List
• Exploded Diagrams

Symbols Used in this Manual
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a procedure or an action.
Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of, equipment.
May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also provide additional
information that is related to a specific subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
Indicates that a particular task must be carried out according to a certain standard after disassembly and before re-assembly, otherwise the quality of the components
in question may be adversely affected.
Indicates that lubrication is needed for the parts after disassembly, when doing a maintenance or replacing a part with a new one.
Lubrication

Revision Status
"Re
Revision Date of Issue Description

A October 1, 2012 First release
Chapter 2
• 2.3Remedies for Service Call Error(p.45): partially deleted
B March 6, 2013 Chapter 4
• 4.1.2Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part(p.227): partially revised
• 4.14.1Main Board initial setting(p.304): was added
Chapter 4
C May 8, 2013
• 4.10.9PG Adjustment(p.277): partially revised
Chapter 2
• 2.1.3.2If necessary to escalate the trouble case(p.43): partially added
• 2.2Remedies for Maintenance Requests(p.44): partially revised
• 2.3Remedies for Service Call Error(p.45): partially deleted (Code1900, 1F10, 1F11, 2008), partially added (Code1A73),
revised TBD items and others.
Chapter 3
D June 21, 2013 • 3.4.4.2DAMPER KIT(p.127): "CAUTION"and "REASSEMBLY" were partially added
• 3.4.4.15IC HOLDER(p.174): "REASSEMBLY" was partially added
• 3.4.4.16INK TUBE(p.178): "REASSEMBLY" was partially added
Chapter 4
• 4.1.2Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part(p.227): partially revised
• 4.2.2NVRAM Write Procedure(p.251): "CAUTION" was added
• 4.11.5.2Head Inclination Manual Adjustment (CR direction)(p.286): "CHECK POINT" was partially added

Chapter 2
• 2.2Remedies for Maintenance Requests(p.44): partially revised
• 2.3Remedies for Service Call Error(p.45): partially revised (Code14B0, 1F80), newly added (Code1430)
Chapter 3
• <General> "Rear Tube Guide" "CR Unit (Ferrite Core Holder)": changed figures.
• 3.4.1.1Unlocking the CR Unit(p.87): partially added
E September 26, 2013 • 3.4.4.2DAMPER KIT(p.127): partially revised
• 3.4.4.16INK TUBE(p.178): "REASSEMBLY" was partially added and partially revised.
Chapter 4
• 4.7Counter Reset(p.261): partially added.
• 4.9Initial Ink Charge Flag(p.264): partially revised.
Chapter 5
• 5.4Exchange Parts(p.318): partially revised.
Chapter 2
• 2.3Remedies for Service Call Error(p.45): Debugging errors (Code D185, D241) and INTERLOCK SWITCH error were
added, typos were corrected.
Chapter 3
• 3.2Parts Diagram(p.75): "Carriage Mechanism" partially revised, "Paper Feed Mechanism / Cutter" partially revised.
• 3.3Disassembly Flowchart(p.82): "CARRIAGE MECHANISM / INK SYSTEM MECHANISM" partially revised, "PAPER
FEED MECHANISM / CUTTER" partially revised.
• 3.4.4.2DAMPER KIT(p.127): "REASSEMBLY"partially added, "CAUTION" partially revised.
• 3.4.4.3PRINT HEAD(p.133): "CHECKPOINT" was added.
F July 29, 2014 • 3.4.4.4HEAD FFC(p.135): partially added.
• 3.4.4.5CR FFC(p.145): partially added.
• 3.4.4.6SHEET ASSY(p.150): Newly added.
• 3.4.4.12APG UNIT(p.170): "REASSEMBLY" partially added.
• 3.4.4.14PUMP CAP UNIT(p.173): "REASSEMBLY" added.
• 3.4.4.18IM SENSOR(p.185): partially added.
• 3.4.4.19PW SENSOR(p.187): partially added.
• 3.4.5.2PF SCALE(p.191): "ADJUSTMENT" was added.
• 3.4.5.12PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT(p.206): Newly added.

Chapter 4
• 4.1.2Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part(p.227): partially revised.
• 4.1.4List of Tools/Software/Consumables for Adjustments(p.248): partially revised.
• 4.5Installing Firmware(p.259): partially revised.
• 4.6Image Print(p.260): "CAUTION" added.
• 4.10.1CR Belt Tension Check(p.265): partially revised.
• 4.11.4Cleaning(p.284): partially revised.
• 4.13.4Cut Position Check & Adjustment(p.299): partially revised.
F July 29, 2014
• 4.13.5Paper Thickness Sensor Adjustment(p.301): partially revised.
• 4.14.3MAC Address Input(p.306): partially added.
• 4.15.4Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment(p.313): partially added.
Chapter 5
• 5.5Cleaning(p.319): “Cleaning the inside of the PLATEN/replacing the INK PAD” added.
Chapter 6
• 6.4Part names used in this manual(p.347): partially added.
Chapter 3
• 3.1.1Precautions(p.71): partially added.
• 3.4.4.2DAMPER KIT(p.127): procedure was added, "REASSEMBLY" was added.
• 3.4.4.3PRINT HEAD(p.133): procedure was added, "REASSEMBLY" was added.
• 3.4.4.4HEAD FFC(p.135): procedure was revised, "REASSEMBLY" partially added.
G March 25, 2015 • 3.4.4.6SHEET ASSY(p.150): partially revised.
• 3.4.4.7CR SCALE(p.159): "REASSEMBLY" was added.
Chapter 4
• 4.1.4List of Tools/Software/Consumables for Adjustments(p.248): "CAUTION" was added.
Chapter 5

SC-T7000 series/SC-T5000 series/SC-T3000 series Revision G
Contents
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1.3.2 If necessary to escalate the trouble case ............................................. 43
2.2 Remedies for Maintenance Requests ................................................................. 44
1.1 Product Description ............................................................................................ 13
2.3 Remedies for Service Call Error ........................................................................ 45
1.2 Basic Specifications ............................................................................................ 14
1.2.1 Basic Specifications ................................................................................... 14 2.4 Remedies for Print Quality Troubles .................................................................. 63
1.2.2 Electric Specifications ............................................................................... 14 2.5 Trouble on Paper Feeding .................................................................................. 66
1.2.3 Ink Specifications ...................................................................................... 15 2.6 Other Troubles .................................................................................................... 67
1.3 Printing Specifications ........................................................................................ 16 2.7 Trouble on Service Program ............................................................................... 68
1.3.1 Paper Feed Specifications .......................................................................... 16
2.8 Trouble on NVRAM Viewer .............................................................................. 69
1.3.2 Supported Media ........................................................................................ 17
1.3.2.1 Epson Special Media Table ................................................................ 17 Chapter 3 DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
1.3.2.2 Usable Commercially Available Paper Size ...................................... 20
1.3.3 Printable area ............................................................................................. 22 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 71
1.3.4 Borderless Printing Specification .............................................................. 23 3.1.1 Precautions ................................................................................................. 71
1.3.5 Stacker ....................................................................................................... 23 3.1.2 Cautions after assembling .......................................................................... 73
1.4 Hardware Specifications ..................................................................................... 24 3.1.3 Orientation Definition ................................................................................ 73
1.4.1 Dimensions and Weight ............................................................................. 24 3.1.4 Recommended Tools ................................................................................. 74
1.4.2 Installation Room Requirement ................................................................. 24 3.2 Parts Diagram ..................................................................................................... 75
1.4.3 Part Names ................................................................................................. 25 3.3 Disassembly Flowchart ...................................................................................... 82
1.5 Control Panel Specifications .............................................................................. 27 3.4 Disassembly and Assembly Procedure ............................................................... 87
1.5.1 Control panel and LCD .............................................................................. 27 3.4.1 Preparation for servicing ........................................................................... 87
1.5.2 Menu Descriptions ..................................................................................... 29 3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit ....................................................................... 87
1.5.3 Serviceman Mode ...................................................................................... 38 3.4.2 Housing ...................................................................................................... 89
3.4.2.1 TOP COVER ...................................................................................... 89
Chapter 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING 3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER ................................................................................ 90
2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 42 3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE ................................................................... 91
2.1.1 Preliminary Check ..................................................................................... 42 3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B ............................................................... 92
2.1.1.1 Before performing troubleshooting .................................................... 42 3.4.2.5 IH COVER ......................................................................................... 93
2.1.1.2 Check for the usage environment ....................................................... 42 3.4.2.6 WASTE INK TANK COVER ........................................................... 96
2.1.1.3 Recurrence check of the trouble ......................................................... 42 3.4.2.7 PRINTER COVER ............................................................................. 97
2.1.1.4 Check for the counter values/history .................................................. 42 3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R COVER ........................................................... 98
2.1.1.5 Test print check .................................................................................. 42 3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER ........................ 99
2.1.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................................ 43 3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER .............................................................. 100
2.1.3 Procedure after troubleshooting ................................................................. 43 3.4.2.11 RIGHT BASE COVER .................................................................. 101
2.1.3.1 If the trouble has been successfully solved ........................................ 43 3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER ................................................................. 102
9
3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER .................................................. 103 3.4.5.3 PF ENCODER .................................................................................. 192
3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER .................................................................. 104 3.4.5.4 PF TIMING BELT ........................................................................... 194
3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER .......................... 105 3.4.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER ...................................................................... 196
3.4.2.16 LEFT BASE COVER ..................................................................... 106 3.4.5.6 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR ...................................................... 197
3.4.2.17 FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER ................................................... 107 3.4.5.7 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR ..................................................... 199
3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER COVER ..................................................... 108 3.4.5.8 ATC MOTOR .................................................................................. 201
3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER FRAME ..................................................... 109 3.4.5.9 PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER) ......................................................... 202
3.4.2.20 CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR .................................................. 110 3.4.5.10 PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER) ...................................................... 203
3.4.2.21 R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR ................................................ 111 3.4.5.11 PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR .................................................... 205
3.4.2.22 L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR ................................................ 112 3.4.5.12 PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT ................................................ 206
3.4.2.23 INTERLOCK SWITCH ................................................................. 113 3.4.6 Cutter Mechanism .................................................................................... 209
3.4.3 Electric Circuit Components .................................................................... 115 3.4.6.1 CUTTER UNIT ................................................................................ 209
3.4.3.1 MAIN BOARD ................................................................................ 115 3.4.7 Fans .......................................................................................................... 211
3.4.3.2 MAIN-B BOARD ............................................................................ 117 3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN ......................................................................... 211
3.4.3.3 MAIN-C BOARD ............................................................................ 118 3.4.7.2 SUCTION FAN ................................................................................ 212
3.4.3.4 SUB BOARD ................................................................................... 119 3.4.8 Auto Take-up Reel ................................................................................... 213
3.4.3.5 SUB-B BOARD ............................................................................... 121 3.4.8.1 TAKE-UP REEL COVER ............................................................... 213
3.4.3.6 PSH BOARD .................................................................................... 122 3.4.8.2 TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR ............................................................. 214
3.4.3.7 PANEL BOARD .............................................................................. 124 3.4.8.3 TAKE-UP REEL LED ..................................................................... 215
3.4.4 Carriage Mechanism / Ink System Mechanism ....................................... 126 3.4.8.4 TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH ............................................................. 216
3.4.4.1 CR COVER ...................................................................................... 126 3.4.8.5 TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD ......................................................... 218
3.4.4.2 DAMPER KIT .................................................................................. 127 3.4.8.6 TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR .............................................................. 220
3.4.4.3 PRINT HEAD .................................................................................. 133 3.4.8.7 TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD ................................................... 222
3.4.4.4 HEAD FFC ....................................................................................... 135
3.4.4.5 CR FFC ............................................................................................. 145 Chapter 4 ADJUSTMENT
3.4.4.6 SHEET ASSY .................................................................................. 150
3.4.4.7 CR SCALE ....................................................................................... 159 4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 226
3.4.4.8 CR ENCODER ................................................................................. 164 4.1.1 Precautions ............................................................................................... 226
3.4.4.9 CR TIMMING BELT ....................................................................... 165 4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part .................................. 227
3.4.4.10 CR MOTOR ................................................................................... 167 4.1.3 Adjustment Items ..................................................................................... 240
3.4.4.11 CR HP SENSOR ............................................................................ 169 4.1.4 List of Tools/Software/Consumables for Adjustments ........................... 248
3.4.4.12 APG UNIT ..................................................................................... 170 4.1.5 Service Program Basic Operations .......................................................... 250
3.4.4.13 PG SENSOR ................................................................................... 172 4.2 NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer ............................................................ 251
3.4.4.14 PUMP CAP UNIT .......................................................................... 173 4.2.1 NVRAM Read Procedure ........................................................................ 251
3.4.4.15 IC HOLDER ................................................................................... 174 4.2.2 NVRAM Write Procedure ....................................................................... 251
3.4.4.16 INK TUBE ..................................................................................... 178 4.2.3 NVRAM Viewer Basic Operation ........................................................... 252
3.4.4.17 CR UNIT ........................................................................................ 182 4.3 ADJUSTMENTS (Individual) ......................................................................... 257
3.4.4.18 IM SENSOR ................................................................................... 185 4.4 ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence) ........................................................................... 258
3.4.4.19 PW SENSOR .................................................................................. 187
3.4.5 Paper Feed Mechanism ............................................................................ 189 4.5 Installing Firmware .......................................................................................... 259
3.4.5.1 PF MOTOR ...................................................................................... 189 4.6 Image Print ....................................................................................................... 260
3.4.5.2 PF SCALE ........................................................................................ 191 4.7 Counter Reset ................................................................................................... 261
10
4.8 References ........................................................................................................ 263 4.14.2 RTC & USB ID Input ............................................................................ 305
4.9 Initial Ink Charge Flag ...................................................................................... 264 4.14.3 MAC Address Input ............................................................................... 306
4.14.4 Serial Number Input .............................................................................. 307
4.10 CR Related Adjustments ................................................................................ 265
4.14.5 HDD S/N Information Writing .............................................................. 308
4.10.1 CR Belt Tension Check ......................................................................... 265
4.14.6 Board Replacement Date & Time Setting ............................................. 309
4.10.2 APG Function Check ............................................................................. 269
4.10.3 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Auto Adjustment ........................................ 270 4.15 Other Printer Checks and Adjustments .......................................................... 310
4.10.4 CR Scale Check ..................................................................................... 271 4.15.1 Suction Fan Adjustment ........................................................................ 310
4.10.5 CR Active Damper Auto Adjustment .................................................... 272 4.15.2 Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset ............................................... 311
4.10.6 Auto Uni-D Adjustment ........................................................................ 273 4.15.3 Operation Panel Check (LCD & Buttons) ............................................. 312
4.10.7 Auto Bi-D Adjustment, acceleration/deceleration print correction ....... 274 4.15.3.1 Panel LCD Operation Check .......................................................... 312
4.10.8 PW + T&B&S check and adjustment .................................................... 275 4.15.3.2 Panel Buttons Operation Check ..................................................... 312
4.10.8.1 PW Adjustment .............................................................................. 275 4.15.4 Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment ..................................... 313
4.10.8.2 T&B&S Adjustment ....................................................................... 275
4.10.9 PG Adjustment ....................................................................................... 277 Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE
4.11 Head Related Checks and Adjustments .......................................................... 280 5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 315
4.11.1 Tube Inner Pressure Reduction .............................................................. 280 5.2 Storing the Printer ............................................................................................ 316
4.11.2 Head ID Input ........................................................................................ 281
4.11.3 Nozzle Check ......................................................................................... 283 5.3 Transportation .................................................................................................. 317
4.11.4 Cleaning ................................................................................................. 284 5.4 Exchange Parts ................................................................................................. 318
4.11.5 Head Inclination Adjustment (CR direction) ......................................... 285 5.5 Cleaning ............................................................................................................ 319
4.11.5.1 Head Inclination Auto Adjustment (CR direction) ........................ 285 5.6 Lubrication ....................................................................................................... 323
4.11.5.2 Head Inclination Manual Adjustment (CR direction) .................... 286
4.11.5.3 Correcting Head Inclination (CR direction) ................................... 286 Chapter 6 APPENDIX
4.11.6 Head Slant Adjustment (PF direction) ................................................... 289
4.11.6.1 Head Slant Auto Adjustment (PF direction) .................................. 289 6.1 Block Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................... 327
4.11.6.2 Head Slant Manual Adjustment (PF direction) .............................. 290 6.1.1 Main Body ............................................................................................... 327
4.11.6.3 Correcting Head Slant (PF direction) ............................................. 291 6.1.2 Auto Take-up Reel ................................................................................... 328
4.12 Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments ................................................ 292 6.2 Connection Diagram ......................................................................................... 329
4.12.1 Ink eject ................................................................................................. 292 6.3 Panel Menu Map .............................................................................................. 344
4.12.2 Cleaning (Tube Inner Cleaning) ............................................................ 293
6.4 Part names used in this manual ........................................................................ 347
4.12.3 Initial Ink Charge ................................................................................... 294
6.5 Exploded Diagram/Parts List ........................................................................... 349
4.13 Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments ............................................... 295
4.13.1 PF Belt Tension Check .......................................................................... 295
4.13.2 PF Scale Check ...................................................................................... 297
4.13.3 Media Feed Auto Adjustment ................................................................ 298
4.13.4 Cut Position Check & Adjustment ........................................................ 299
4.13.5 Paper Thickness Sensor Adjustment ..................................................... 301
4.13.6 Rear AD Adjustment ............................................................................. 303
4.14 Boards Related Checks and Adjustments ....................................................... 304
4.14.1 Main Board initial setting ...................................................................... 304
11
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

1.1 Product Description  Space saving design

Front access design allows you to set the printer near a wall because you can
 Models exchange the media, ink cartridges, maintenance box, and cutter from the front.
 SC-T7000 series: 1118 mm (44 inch); supports Super B0  New driver and applications
 SC-T5000 series: 914 mm (36 inch); supports Super A0  Brand-new driver with simple UI
 SC-T3000 series: 620 mm (24 inch); supports Super A1  With the web UI OS-independent configuration and control of HDD through
 Supported paper thickness the Web are available.
Up to 1.5 mm  Provides the job monitoring and management functions using a job
monitoring tool.
 Ink configuration
 Easy printing from Microsoft Office using dedicated plug-in software
Brand-new water color pigment ink configuration with excellent black tone
important in quality CAD line drawing and highly vivid red essential for  Improved shorter occupancy time of the host PC
commercial posters  Occupancy time of the host PC has been significantly shortened with ESC/
Ink configuration: Cyan, Yellow, Magenta, Matte black, Photo black Page and HP-GL2/RTL.
 High-speed throughput  By adding the optional HDD unit, PC-less re-printing and more shortened
Prints A1 plain paper in 28sec. occupancy time become available.
 High print quality  Lower running cost
 For posters:  Independent ink cartridges for each color
Excellent print quality in 4 colors, with resolution of up to 2800x1440  high-capacity (700ml/350ml/150ml) ink cartridges
dpi, and in variable dot sizes (minimal 3.5 picoliter)  PC-less enlarged photocopy
 For CAD: Simply connecting a scanner enables PC-less enlarged photocopy.
High quality CAD line drawing achieved by optimizing the  Large sized LEDs
combination of new inks and print modes Equipped with large-sized LEDs for easier recognition of the printer’s error status
 Media handling
 Easier paper loading available thanks to the design for front-access and
spindle-less with optimal height based on ergonomics
 Supports continuous printing of drawings or posters (in a standard size such as
A0, A1 or US-ANSI D/E)
 Translucent printer cover allows you to check which roll paper is loaded
easily
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Description 13

1.2 Basic Specifications 1.2.2 Electric Specifications

Specification
1.2.1 Basic Specifications Item
SC-T7000 series SC-T5000 series SC-T3000 series
Item Specification Rated voltage 100 to 240 VAC
Print method On-demand inkjet Input voltage range 90 to 264 VAC
360 nozzles x 2 lines x 2 colors (Photo Rated current 1.0 A to 0.5 A 0.9 A to 0.5 A 0.8 A to 0.4 A
Black
Configuratio Black, Matte Black) Rated frequency 50 to 60 Hz
n of nozzles 360 nozzles x 2 lines x 3 colors Input frequency range 49.5 to 60.5 Hz
Color
(Yellow, Magenta, Cyan) Operating Approx. 72 W Approx. 65 W Approx. 54 W
Maximum resolution 2,880 x 1,440dpi Power
Sleep mode 3.0 W or less
consumption
 ESC/P Raster (commands are Power OFF 0.4 W or less
Control code nondisclosure)
 HP-GL/2, HP-RTL
Insulation resistance 10 MΩ or more (between AC line and chassis at 500 VDC)
Paper feed method Friction 1.0 kV rms AC for 1 min. or 1.2 kV rms AC for 1 sec.
Dielectric strength
(between AC line and chassis)
For Main 512 MB
RAM Leek current 0.25 mA or less
For Network 128 MB
Conforms to International Energy Star Program
 High-Speed USB Compliance with regulations (Category: the harmonic restraint measure guideline)
Interface  Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-TX/ Conforms to VCCI Class B (with full options installed)
1000Base-T)
Main body operation environment 10°C to 35 °C
-20 °C to 60 °C
When storing (packed) (within 120 hours under 60 °C, and
Temperature
within 1 month under 40 °C)
-20 °C to 40 °C
When storing (unpacked)
(within 1 month under 40 °C)
Main body operation environment 20% to 80% (Non condensing)
Humidity When storing (packed) 5% to 85% (Non condensing)
When storing (unpacked) 5% to 85% (Non condensing)
*Nozzle set configuration is;
Row A Row B Row C Row D Row E Row F Row G Row H Row I Row J
C M Y PK MK MK PK Y M C
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 14

1.2.3 Ink Specifications

Item Specification
Form Exclusive ink cartridge
Pigment ink  Black system: Photo Black, Matte Black
colors  Color system: Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Cartridge life See the date printed on the package (at normal temperature)
Guaranteed life
after 1 year (after mounted in the printer)
installation
 Uninstalled (packed): -20 to 40 °C
(within 4 days under -20 °C, and within 1 month under 40 °C)
 Installed: -20 to 40 °C
Storage (within 4 days under -20 °C, and within 1 month under 40 °C)
 Transporting (packed): -20 to 60 °C
(within 4 days under -20 °C, within 1 month under 40 °C, and within 72
hours under 60 °C)
Capacity 700 ml/350 ml/110ml
 700ml: W40 x L305 x H110 mm
Dimensions  350ml: W40 x L200 x H110 mm
 110ml: W25 x L200 x H110 mm
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 15

1.3 Printing Specifications
1.3.1 Paper Feed Specifications

Item Specification
Paper feed method Friction feed
Return pitch 2.2049 μm (1/11,520 inch)
 Roll paper manual feed
Paper feeder
 Cut sheet manual feed
Feed speed  300ms/ (1/6 inch)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 16

1.3.2 Supported Media

1.3.2.1 Epson Special Media Table
ROLL PAPER
Note "*1": SC-T3000 Series not supported "*5": When a scanner is connected
"*2": SC-T3000 Series/SC-T5000 Series not supported "*6": : Borderless printing available, but borders may appear or print quality decline due to paper
"*3": When the optional auto take-up reel unit is used (SC-T7000 series) expanding or contracting.
"*4": Use the tensioner supplied with the auto take-up reel unit.
Size Core Take-up*3

Thickness Borderless Head
Name Diameter Enlarged*5 ICC Profile
(mm) Print*6 Alignment
mm inch (inch) Forward Backward
406 16
EPSON SC-
610 24
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) 0.27 3 √ √ √ √ √ T3000_5000_7000_Series Premium
914*1 36*1 Glossy Photo Paper 250.icc
1118*2 44*2
406 16
EPSON SC-
610 24
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250) 0.27 3 √ √ √ √ √ T3000_5000_7000_Series Premium
914*1 36*1 Semigloss Photo Paper 250.icc
1118*2 44*2
254 10
- -
300 11.8 √
406 16 EPSON SC-
Premium Luster Photo Paper (260) 508 20 0.27 3 - √ √ T3000_5000_7000_Series Premium
610 24 √ √ Luster Photo Paper 260.icc
914*1 36*1 √
1118*2 44*2
406 16
EPSON SC-
610 24
Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (260) 0.27 3 √ √ √ √ √ T3000_5000_7000_Series Premium
914*1 36*1
Semimatte Photo Paper 260.icc
1118*2 44*2
432 17
EPSON SC-
610 24
Photo Paper Gloss 250 0.25 3 √ √ √ √ √ T3000_5000_7000_Series Photo
914*1 36*1
Paper Gloss 250.icc
1118*2 44*2

Size Core Take-up*3

Thickness Borderless Head
Name Diameter Enlarged*5 ICC Profile
(mm) Print*6 Alignment
mm inch (inch) Forward Backward
420 (A2) --- -

610 24 EPSON SC-
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (170) 0.18 2 √ √ √ √ T3000_5000_7000_Series Premium
914*1 36*1 √ Glossy Photo Paper 170.icc
1118*2 44*2
420 (A2) --- -
610 24 EPSON SC-
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (170) 0.18 2 √ √ √ √ T3000_5000_7000_Series Premium
914*1 36*1 √ Semigloss Photo Paper 170.icc
1118*2 44*2
610 24 EPSON SC-
Enhanced Synthetic Paper 0.13 2  √ √ - - T3000_5000_7000_Series Enhanced
1118*2 44*2
Synthetic Paper.icc
610 24 EPSON SC-
Enhanced Adhesive Synthetic Paper 0.18 2  √ √ - - T3000_5000_7000_Series Enhanced
1118*2 44*2
Adhesive Synthetic Paper.icc
610 24 EPSON SC-
Doubleweight Matte Paper 914*1 36*1 0.21 2 √ √*4 - √ √ T3000_5000_7000_Series
1118*2 44*2 Doubleweight Matte Paper.icc
432 17
EPSON SC-
610 24
Enhanced Matte Paper 0.25 3  √ - - √ T3000_5000_7000_Series Enhanced
914 36
and Archival Matte Paper.icc
1118 44
432 17
EPSON SC-
610 24
Singleweight Matte Paper 0.15 2 √ √*4 - √ √ T3000_5000_7000_Series
914*1 36*1
Singleweight Matte Paper.icc
1118*2 44*2

CUT SHEET
Note "*1": SC-T3000 Series not supported

"*2": When a scanner is connected
"*3": : Borderless printing available, but borders may appear or print quality decline due to paper expanding or contracting.
Thickness
Name Size Borderless*3 Enlarged*2 Head Alignment ICC Profile
(mm)
Super A3/B 
Premium Glossy Photo Paper A2 0.27 - √ √ EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Premium Glossy Photo Paper.icc
US-C 
Super A3/B 
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper A2 0.27 - √ √ EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Premium Semigloss Photo Paper.icc
US-C 
Super B 
Premium Luster Photo Paper A2 0.27 - √ √ EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Premium Luster Photo Paper.icc
US-C 
Super A3/B 
Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Enhanced and Archival Matte
Paper
A2 0.26 - - √ Paper.icc
US-C 
Super A3/B 
Photo Quality Inkjet Paper A2 0.12 - - √ EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Photo Quality Ink Jet Paper.icc
US-C 
610 x 762 mm
(24" x 30")
Enhanced Matte Posterboard 1.30 - - - EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Enhanced Matte Poster Board.icc
762 x 1016 mm
(30" x 40")*1

1.3.2.2 Usable Commercially Available Paper Size ROLL PAPER

This printer supports the following paper specifications for non-Epson media.
Item Specification
C A U T IO N
 Do not use paper that is wrinkled, scuffed, torn, or dirty. Media types Plain paper and recycled paper
 Although plain paper and recycled paper manufactured by Paper core size 2 inch and 3 inch
other companies can be loaded and fed in the printer as long as
they meet the following specifications, Epson cannot guarantee Roll paper outer
150 mm or less
diameter
the print quality.
 Although other paper types manufactured by other companies  SC-T7000 Series: 254 mm (10 inches) to 1,118 mm (44 inches)
can be loaded in the printer as long as they meet the following Width  SC-T5000 Series: 254 mm (10 inches) to 914 mm (36 inches)
specifications, Epson cannot guarantee the paper feeding and  SC-T3000 Series: 254 mm (10 inches) to 610 mm (24 inches)
print quality. Paper thickness 0.08 to 0.5 mm
Basis weight 64 to 90g/m2
254 mm/10 inch
300 mm/11.8 inch
Super A3/B/329 mm
406 mm/16 inch
17 inch
B2/515mm
Available width for
A1/594mm
borderless printing
610 mm/24 inch
728 mm
A0/841 mm
914 mm/36 inch
1030 mm
1118 mm/44 inch

CUT SHEET
Item Specification
Media types Plain paper and recycled paper
 SC-T7000 Series: 210 mm (A4) to 1,118 mm (44 inches)
Width  SC-T5000 Series: 210 mm (A4) to 914 mm (36 inches)
 SC-T3000 Series: 210 mm (A4) to 610 mm (24 inches)
Length 279.4 to 1,580 mm

Paper thickness 0.08 to 0.8 mm
254 mm/10 inch
300 mm/11.8 inch
Super A3/B/329 mm
406 mm/16 inch
17 inch
B2/515 mm
Available width for
A1/594 mm
borderless printing
610 mm/24 inch
728 mm
A0/841 mm
914 mm/36 inch
1030 mm
1118 mm/44 inch

1.3.3 Printable area Table 1-1. Roll Paper Margin

Roll Paper Margin Parameter Margin Values
ROLL PAPER A = 45mm
Note "*1": SC-T7000 Series Top45mm/Bottom15mm C =15mm
"*2": SC-T5000 Series
B, D = 3mm
"*3": SC-T3000 Series
"*4": If “Banner” is selected for “Roll Paper Option” in the printer driver “Advanced” tab, the top 3mm A, B, C, D = 3mm
and bottom margins are 0 mm.
15mm A, B, C, D = 15mm
254mm~1118mm 㪁㪈
3mm/15mm
254mm~914mm 㪁㪉
0mm/3mm
When “Normal” is selected, the value for A is 20 mm for the following paper.
254mm~620mm 㪁㪊
C 㪁㪋 3mm/15mm
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) / Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250) / Premium
Luster Photo Paper (260) / Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (260)
When the following media are used in the “CAD / Line Drawing” mode, the value for
127mm A and C is 3 mm.
~
15m B D
Singleweight Matte Paper
CUT SHEET
A 㪁㪋 3~45mm
Table 1-1. Roll Paper Margin

Roll Paper Margin Parameter Margin Values
A, C = 15mm*
Normal
B, D = 3mm
A, C = 15mm
Top15mm/Bottom15mm
B, D = 3mm
A = 35mm
Top35mm/Bottom15mm C =15mm
B, D =3mm

1.3.4 Borderless Printing Specification Printer driver

Cutting Operation Explanation
settings
AVAILABLE PAPER TYPE  The top area may become slightly uneven
depending on the image since the print
For the paper types and sizes that support the borderless printing, see "1.3.2.1 Epson operation stops while cutting the top edge of
Special Media Table" (p17). the roll paper.
A  The printed paper is approximately 2 mm
ROLL PAPER CUTTING OPERATION shorter than the specified size since the printer
Double Cut cuts the paper inside the image to avoid
showing top and bottom margins.
Printer driver
Cutting Operation Explanation B  After cutting the bottom edge of the previous
settings
page, the printer feeds the paper, and then cuts
the top edge of the following page. Although
this produces 60 to 127 mm cut-off pieces, the
A cut is more accurate.
Borderless The default printer driver setting is “Borderless”.

1.3.5 Stacker
B Table 1-2. Continuous Stacker
Stackable Pages
 The top area may become slightly uneven Paper size Paper Type SC-T3000 SC-T5000 SC-T7000
depending on the image since the print Series Series Series
operation stops while cutting the top edge of
A1 594 x 841mm 20 pages 20 pages 20 pages
the roll paper. Plain paper
 If the cut position is misaligned slightly, small A0 841 x 1,189mm --- 20 pages 20 pages
A parts of the image may be shown on the top or
bottom of the adjacent pages. If this occurs, Table 1-3. Single Sheet Stacker
Single Cut
perform “Adjust Cut Position”.
 When printing only one page the operation
Maximum Length
B
performed is the same as that for “Double Cut”. SC-T3000 Series SC-T5000 Series SC-T7000 Series
When continuously printing multiple sheets,
the printer cuts 1 mm inside on the top edge of Approx. 1,292 mm Approx. 1,292 mm Approx. 1,575 mm
the first page and the bottom edge of the
subsequent pages to avoid showing margins.

1.4 Hardware Specifications 1.4.2 Installation Room Requirement

This section provides the printer dimensions and shows the main components.
1.4.1 Dimensions and Weight

Model Width Depth*1 Height Weight*2
SC-T7000 Series 1,608 mm 813 mm 1,128 mm Approx. 82 kg
SC-T5000 Series 1,405 mm 813 mm 1,128 mm Approx. 75 kg
SC-T3000 Series
1,050 mm 691 mm 613 mm Approx. 51 kg
(w/o dedicated stand)
SC-T3000 Series
1,050 mm 813 mm 1,128 mm Approx. 61 kg
(w/ dedicated stand)
Note 1: When the paper basket is retracted
2: Excluding ink cartridges Figure 1-1. SC-T7000 Series/SC-T5000 Series
Figure 1-2. SC-T3000 Series
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 24

1.4.3 Part Names Table 1-4. Front Side

No. Name
FRONT SIDE
1 Printer cover
2 Poster board support
3 Maintenance box covers
4 Paper basket
5 Casters
6 Stack guides
7 Stack guide switch lever
8 Cartridge cover
9 Ink cartridges
10 AC inlet
11 Option port
12 LAN port
13 Data light
14 Status light
15 USB port
16 Control panel
17 Alert lamp
18 Roll rest
19 Adapter guides
20 Roll lock lever
21 Adapter holder
22 Paper slot
Figure 1-3. Front Side 23 Print head
24 Roll paper cover
25 Paper eject guide

ROLL PAPER ADAPTER
Figure 1-4. Roll paper adapter
Table 1-5. Roll paper adapter

No. Name
1 Adapter lock lever
2 Size lever

1.5 Control Panel Specifications Table 1-6. Control panel

Name Function
1.5.1 Control panel and LCD 1 Power button Turns the power on and off.
 On: The power is on.
CONTROL PANEL  Flashing: The printer is receiving data or cleaning the
2 Power light print head or performing other operations in
the course of being shut down.
 Off: The power is off.
3 Load/Remove Paper button Displays the Load/Remove Paper menu.

Displays the printer’s status, menus, error messages, and
4 Screen
so on.
Displays the menu for the tab currently selected in the
5 [Menu] button
display.
If menus are displayed, pressing this button takes you up
6 Back button
one level in the menu hierarchy.
7 Left/Right buttons Use these buttons to select tabs.
When menus are displayed, these buttons can be used to
8 Up/Down buttons
highlight items or options.
 Displays the menu for the tab currently selected in the
display.
 When menus are displayed and an item is highlighted,
9 OK button pressing this button displays the sub-menu for the
highlighted item.
 If pressed while a parameter is selected from the Menu,
the parameter is set or executed.
10 Help button Displays the Help menu.
Displays the Maintenance menu, which is used for nozzle
11 Maintenance button
checks and head cleaning.
 The printer enters pause status if this is pressed while
printing.
Figure 1-5. Control panel 12 Pause/Cancel button  Pressing this button while a menu or help is displayed
closes the menu or help and returns the printer to ready
status.
 It is used to manually cut roll paper using the built-in
cutter.
13 Feed/Cut Media button  If printing is not currently in progress and the printer is
loaded with roll paper, you can feed paper ahead by
pressing first this button and then the [] button.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel Specifications 27

LCD Table 1-7. LCD

Name Function
 Screen View
Print Displays print job status and can be used to access the
Queues Tab Print Queues menu.
Shows the type of paper in the printer and can be used to
Paper Tab
access the Paper menu.
Displays ink status.
The ink cartridge status is indicated as follows.
: No error.
: Ink is low.
Ink Tab
: Ink cartridge is expended.
Figure 1-6. LCD

: An error occurred.
Table 1-7. LCD Tabs/Info
2
Display Area
Name Function
: Non-genuine cartridge is installed.
Displays the printer’s status, operation, and error
1 Message
messages. Shows the status of the Maintenance Box and is used to
display the Maintenance menu.
Maintenance Box status is shown as follows.
Maintenance : No error.
Tab
: The Maintenance Box is nearing the end of
its service life.
: Maintenance Box is at the end of its service
life.
Setup Tab Displays the IP address and menus for various settings.
Enlarged
Displayed only when a scanner is connected.
Copy Tab

1.5.2 Menu Descriptions

Note "*1": Displayed only when optional hard disk unit is installed.
Table 1-8. Menu List
Menu Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default) Explanation
Lists the estimated start time and time needed to print the selected job.
Waiting Job Name It also predicts whether the job can be completed without replacing paper, ink or the
Maintenance Box. Printing can proceed even if “Can Not Complete” is displayed.
User
However, the printer may run out of ink or paper during printing.
Estimated Start
Remote Manager and the LFP HDD Utility display the reason for the “Can Not
XXXXXXXXXXX Time
Print Queue*1 Complete” message and allow you to hold or cancel the job.
(name of queued print job) Estimated Print
The printer will only predict availability on the basis of the amount of paper
Time
remaining if “On” is selected for “Roll Paper Remaining”.
Printing
The printer will not predict availability on the basis of the amount of ink remaining
Availability
when documents are printed using LFP Print Plug-In for Office or EPSON
CopyFactory5.
This option is available only if “On” is selected for “Store Held Job” in the Setup
Paused Job Name menu.
User Displays the print settings for held jobs and the reason the job is held.
XXXXXXXXXXX
Paper Type Jobs that are held because the job print settings differ from those currently selected
View Hold Queue (name of held print
Hold Queue*1 Source for the printer can be printed as described below.
Print Queues menu job)
Size 1. Replace the paper and take whatever other steps may be necessary to ready the
Reason For Hold device for printing.
2. Select “Resume All Jobs”.
Resume All Jobs Press the [OK] button to resume all held jobs currently in the queue.
Stored Job Name
User
Length
Pages Shows the status of the selected stored job when it was last printed.
XXXXXXXXXXX (name of stored print Paper Type After viewing the job, press the [OK] button to enter the number of copies. Press the
Saved Job Queue*1
job) Copies []/[] buttons to choose the number of copies and press the [OK] button to display
Source the estimated print time and print availability. Press the [OK] button to start printing.
Size
Estimated Print
Time
Print Job Log Sheet Press the [OK] button to print the print job log.


Press the [OK] button to view instructions for removing the paper. Follow the on-
Remove Paper screen instructions to remove the paper.
Instructions are not displayed if no paper is loaded.
Load/Remove Paper Roll Paper Highlight the paper to be loaded and press the [OK] button. Follow the on-screen
Cut Sheet (up to 0.8 instructions to load the paper.
mm thick) If paper is already loaded in the printer, the instructions for removing the loaded
Poster Board paper type will be displayed before loading instructions are shown.
Photo Paper
Matte Paper
Select the type of paper loaded.
Select Paper Type Plain Paper
Others
Custom Paper Select the name of the custom paper loaded in the printer.
Paper menu
Photo Paper
Matte Paper
Select Reference You can select the media type that is the closest to the paper you are using.
Plain Paper
Paper
Others
XXXXXXXXXXX No Paper Selected Select this option if you do not wish to specify the paper type.
Custom Paper
(name of custom Narrow
Setting Select the platen gap which is the distance between the print head and the paper.
paper type)
Standard Normally, select “Standard”. Select a wider setting if printed images are smeared. If,
Platen Gap
Wide upon performing head alignment you feel that it is still not completely aligned, select
“Narrow”.
Wider
Detect Paper Press the [OK] button to print a pattern to determine the thickness of the current paper.
Thickness Select the pattern number with the least misalignment from the print results.


Pattern Use this setting if you are unable to resolve banding issues (horizontal striped lines or
uneven colors) in the standard print area (for cut sheets, the area excluding the 1 to 2
cm strip at the bottom of the paper) even after head cleaning or head alignment.
When “Pattern” is selected;
Press the [OK] button to print an adjustment pattern. Measure the distances between
the “+” symbols in the printed adjustment pattern. Use only the distance between the
center symbols or the average of the distances between the left, center, and right
symbols.
Paper Feed Adjust

Value
XXXXXXXXXXX
Custom Paper
Paper menu (name of custom
Setting
paper type)
After the adjustment pattern is printing, the length of the pattern will be displayed in
the control panel. Press the []/[] buttons to enter the measured value and press
the [OK] button.
When “Value” is selected;
Choose an adjustment between -0.70 and +0.70%. Selecting too small a value causes
dark bands; adjust the amount upward. Similarly, choosing too large a value causes
white bands; adjust the amount downward.
It is important to choose the appropriate amount of suction for the paper used in order
to maintain the correct distance between the paper and the print head. Choosing too
high a value for thin or soft paper will increase the distance between the paper and the
Paper Suction -4 to 0
print head, causing print quality to decline or preventing the paper feeding correctly.
If this happens, lower the paper suction. The suction power is weakened when the
parameter is lowered.
Normal
Roll Paper Tension High Select “High” or “Extra High” if the paper wrinkles during printing.
Extra High


On
Remove Skew Select whether to enable (“On”) or disable (“Off”) paper skew reduction.
Off
XXXXXXXXXXX
Custom Paper Enter a name of up to 22 characters for custom paper settings. Choose an easy-to-remember name for quick
(name of custom Setting Name
Paper menu Setting selection.
paper type)
Yes
Restore Settings Restore the selected custom paper settings to default values.
No
Print Paper List Press the [OK] button to print a list of custom paper settings.
Press the [OK] button to print a nozzle check pattern. Visually inspect the printed pattern and perform head
Nozzle Check
cleaning if you notice faint or missing areas.
Inspect the printed pattern and select the check boxes for patterns with faint or missing areas. To select all
Head Cleaning
nozzles, place a check in the box on the left.
Auto(Uni-D)
If print results are grainy or out of focus, perform head alignment to realign the print head. If “Auto” is
Auto(Bi-D) selected, the printer will scan the printed pattern during printing and realign the head automatically.
Maintenance menu Head Alignment
Manual(Uni-D) If “Manual” is selected, a pattern will be printed; inspect the pattern visually and enter the value you think
appropriate.
Manual(Bi-D)
You can fine tune the cut position when printing to roll paper with no margins in all
Adjust Cut Position -3 to 3 mm
directions. The cut position can be adjusted in increments of 0.2 mm.
Cutter Maintenance
Moves the cutter to the replacement position so it can be replaced. Press the [OK] button to move the cutter
Replace Cutter
to the replacement position. The paper must be removed before replacing the cutter.
On Choose “On” to automatically cut roll paper using the built-in cutter as each page is
Auto Cut printed, “Off” to disable auto paper cutting. The setting selected with the printer
Off driver takes priority when the printer driver is used.
On If “On” is selected during borderless printing, the printer will automatically trim the
Refresh Margin leading edge to remove any ink stains that may have been left by the previous copy;
Off to disable this feature, choose “Off”.
Setup menu Printer Setup Roll Paper Setup On If “Auto Cut” is “Off”, you can choose to print (“On”) or not print (“Off”) cut lines
on roll paper. Cut lines are not printed if “Auto Cut” is “On” or when cut sheets or
poster board is used.
Note, however, that if the roll width selected with the computer is narrower than the
Page Line
Off paper loaded in the printer, cut lines will be printed regardless of the option selected
for “Auto Cut”.
The setting selected with the printer driver takes priority when the printer driver is
used.


Normal
Top 15 mm/
Bottom 15 mm
Top 35 mm/ When set to “Normal”, the top and bottom margins are 15 mm, and the left and right
Roll Paper Margin Bottom 15 mm margins are 3 mm.
Top 45 mm/ Except for “15 mm”, the left and right margins for all other settings are 3 mm.
Bottom 15 mm
3 mm
15 mm
On Select whether to display/record (“On”) or not to display/record (“Off”) the amount
Roll Paper Setup of remaining roll paper. The following options can be made available by selecting
“On” and entering the length of the roll.
 Amount of roll paper remaining
When the roll is removed, a barcode will automatically be printed on the roll
Roll Paper
stating the length remaining, the value selected for the roll remaining alert, and the
Remaining Off paper type.
Setup menu Printer Setup The barcode is automatically read and settings adjusted the next time the paper is
used, improving efficiency when multiple rolls of paper are used.
 Printing Availability
The printer will estimate printing availability based on the length of the roll.
Displayed when “On” is selected for “Roll Paper Remaining”.
1 to 15 m (4 to 50
Remaining Alert Set within a range from 1 to 15 m (4 to 50 ft) to display a warning when the amount
ft)
of remaining roll paper drops below that limit. You can set in 0.5 m (1 ft) increments.
Low Select “High” or “Extra High” if the paper wrinkles during printing.
Normal “Roll Paper Tension” can be specified separately for each paper type using the
“Custom Paper Setting” option in the Paper menu.
Roll Paper Tension High
When “Custom Paper” is chosen for “Select Paper Type”, the printer will use the
value selected for “Roll Paper Tension” in the “Custom Paper Setting”.
Advanced Settings Extra High
This setting takes effect if no custom roll paper tension is specified.
On If the paper is thick, the print head may scuff the print surface. Choose “On” to
prevent scuffing. This option can be used to temporarily change the value selected for
Less Head Scuffing
Off “Custom Paper Setting” > “Platen Gap” in the Paper menu. Note, however, that “On”
has no effect when “Wider” is selected for “Platen Gap”.


Specify how long the printer pauses to allow the ink to dry after printing each page;
choose from values between 0 and 60 minutes. Depending on the ink density or paper
Drying Time Per
0 to 60 minutes type, the ink may take a while to dry. If the ink blurs on the paper, set a longer time
Page
for drying the ink.
The longer the drying time, the more time required for printing.
On Choose whether the printer automatically detects (“On”) or does not detect (“Off”)
the paper width. Try choosing “Off” if a paper setting error is displayed when the
paper is correctly loaded. Note, however, that the printer may print outside the paper
Paper Size Check
Off when “Off” is selected. If it prints beyond the edges of the paper, the inside of the
printer becomes dirty with ink. We generally recommend to operate with this setting
set to “On”.
Advanced Settings On If “On” is selected, an error will be displayed in the control panel and printing will
Paper Skew Check stop if the paper is skewed; select “Off” to disable this feature. “On” is recommended
Printer Setup Off in most circumstances as skewed paper may cause the printer to jam.
On This item is available when an optional hard disk unit is installed. If “On” is selected,
print jobs that require a paper type, source, or output paper size (width) that differs
Setup menu from those currently selected with the printer will be saved as held jobs; select “Off”
to disable this feature.
If “Off” is selected, an error will be displayed and will printing will stop if the source
Store Held Job
Off selected for the print job does not match that selected with the printer.
If “On” is selected, printing will not stop if an error occurs; instead, jobs with non-
matching settings will be saved to the hard disk unit as held jobs. Held jobs can be
printed from the Print Queues menu after the printer has been readied by, for
example, loading the correct type of paper.
Yes
Restore Settings Select “Yes” to restore all printer settings to default values.
No
Firmware Version xxxxxxx,x.xx,xxxx You can see the firmware version.
Option Status Lists the optional accessories currently connected to the printer and available for use.
Printer Status XXXXXXX m2

Show Total Prints View the total area printed (six-figure maximum).
(XXXXXX ft2)
Press the [OK] button to print a list of current printer settings.
Print Status Sheet
Choose this option to view settings at a glance.


Auto Select whether to use DHCP to set the IP address (“Auto”), or to set the address
IP Address Setting manually (“Panel”). Choose “Panel” to enter the “IP address”, “Subnet Mask”, and
Panel “Default Gateway”.
Network Setup Press the [OK] button to print a list of network settings. Choose this option to view network settings at a
Print Status Sheet
glance.
Yes
Restore Settings Select “Yes” to restore all network settings to default values.
No
Sleep Mode 5 to 180 minutes Use this option to choose the period before the printer enters sleep mode.
Off The printer turns off automatically when there are no errors, no print jobs being
received, and no control panel or other operations are performed for eight hours.
Power Off Timer The delay before the printer turns off can be selected from values between 1 and 24
Power Settings 1 to 24 hours hours in increments of 1 hour.
Choose “Off” to prevent the printer turning off automatically.
Yes
Restore Settings Select “Yes” to restore all “Power Settings” to default values.
No
Japanese
Setup menu
English
French
Italian
German
Language Portuguese Select the language used on the control panel’s screen.
Spanish
Preference Dutch
Russian
Korean
Chinese
m Select the unit of length which is displayed on the control panel’s screen or printed on
Unit: Length
ft/in the patterns.
On Choose whether the large alert lamp lights (“On”) or does not light (“Off”) when an
Alert Lamp Setting
Off error occurs.


Enter an administrator password of up to 20 characters.
Change Password Selecting Administrator Menu displays a password prompt. The Administrator Menu will only be displayed
if the correct password is entered, preventing non-administrators from accidentally changing settings.
Password Required
Choose whether the administrator password is required to access “Network Setup”
Operational Control Network Setup No Password from the control panel or Remote Manager.
Required
Power Cleaning
Administrator
Setup menu
Menu
Inspect the printed pattern and select the check boxes for patterns with faint or missing areas. To select all
nozzles, place a check in the box on the left.
Yes Select “Yes” to format the optional hard disk unit currently attached to the printer.
Formatting the hard disk unit deletes all stored print jobs.
Manage HDD Format Hard Disk
No Hard disk units that have been used with other printers must be formatted before they
can be used this printer.
MM/DD/YY Set the printer’s built-in clock. The printer clock provides the times that appear in
Date And Time
HH:MM print outs of job information and printer status.
Enter the difference between the current time zone and GMT.
Time Zone
The selected time zone is used in e-mail notifications sent by Remote Manager when an error occurs.
Yes Select “Yes” to restore defaults for all settings except the “Date And Time”,
Reset All Settings
No “Language”, and “Unit: Length” options in the Setup menu.


Color
Color/B&W Choose whether to copy in color or in black and white.
B&W
With Border Document sizes are listed to the left of the arrows.
The copy is enlarged to fit the width of the roll currently loaded in the printer. The
A3->Auto, B4->Auto, A4->Auto,
maximum size is 914 mm (36 inches). If a roll wider than 36 inches is loaded in the
B5->Auto, A5->Auto, LTR->Auto,
Borderless SC-T7000 Series, the maximum size is still 36 inches.
4x6->Auto, A4/2->Banner (Auto)
To print without borders, select “Borderless”.
The sizes available vary with the scanner.
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Select the size of the original document when copying at other sizes.
Auto Document Size
Enlarged Copy LTR, 4x6 The sizes available vary with the scanner.
menu
A0, US E, B1, A1, Choose the output size when copying at other sizes.
Other Size Output Size USD, B2, US C, “A0(2Sheets)” is available only with the SC-T3000 Series.
A2, A0(2Sheets) “A0” is available only with the SC-T5000 Series / SC-T7000 Series.
With Border
Border To print without borders, select “Borderless”.
Borderless
Draft
Quality Choose copy quality and print speed.
Fine
Five options from
Density Choose copy density.
Light to Dark

1.5.3 Serviceman Mode

The Serviceman Mode is intended to be used by a service person for servicing the printer.
HOW TO START & QUIT
1. Turn the printer on by pressing the [Menu], [Back], and [OK] buttons together.
2. Turn the printer off to quit the Serviceman Mode.
SERVICEMAN MODE MENU LIST
Menu
Explanation
Class 1 2 3
Paper Adjusts the detection accuracy of the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR.
Rear AD Adjusts the AD value of the PE Sensor.
CR Un Cap Unlocks or re-locks the carriage and uncaps/re-caps the Print Head.
Red
Mecha Adjustment
LCD RGB Check Green Checks the operation of the LCD.
Blue
Panel Check Checks the operation of the buttons and the LEDs.
Sensor Check ILS Checks the operation of sensors.

Menu
Explanation
Class 1 2 3
PG--
PG-
PG PGtyp
PG+
PG++
400 CPS
H to F Speed 500 CPS
Life CR Used only in manufacturing processes. Not used in service operations.
240 CPS
400 CPS
F to H Speed 500 CPS
240 CPS
Page Size
Fan
Life Count

Menu
Explanation
Class 1 2 3
Feed Amount 1
PS1
PS2
Feed Speed 1
PS3
PS4
Feed Amount 2
PF PS1
PS2
Feed Speed 2
PS3
PS4
Wait
Fan
Life Count
Wait1
Life Used only in manufacturing processes. Not used in service operations.
RLS Wait2
Life Count
PG--
PG-
PG PGtyp
APG PG+
PG++
Wait
Life Count
Length
Return Length
Cutter
Wait
Life Count
Display Count

CHAPTER
2
TROUBLE SHOOTING

2.1 Overview 2.1.1.3 Recurrence check of the trouble

Check if the trouble the user claims recurs with the returned printer.
This section explains the basic procedure for troubleshooting problems on the printer
quickly and efficiently.  If RIP was used, check if the trouble recurs when the driver is used.
When carrying out the troubleshooting procedures, take a flexible measure following  If 3rd party's media were used, check if the trouble recurs when a genuine
your sales company's policy and considering the troubling situation. medium is used.
 If 3rd party's ink was used, perform the repair according to the policy of each
2.1.1 Preliminary Check local sales subsidiary.
Make sure to verify or perform the following basic items whenever servicing the  If the F/W was not the latest, gain agreement with the user on the update of F/
printer. W, and check if the trouble recurs when the latest F/W is used.
2.1.1.1 Before performing troubleshooting 2.1.1.4 Check for the counter values/history
Download NVRAM and check the following with NVRAM Viewer. (For the check
Before troubleshooting, perform basic checks such as connection check of the power
method, see P.252.)
cable and installation check of the ink cartridges.
 Counter history of the periodic replacement parts. (if any part's life is near.)
2.1.1.2 Check for the usage environment  Printer's operating history (if any cause for the trouble exists)
Check the user's usage environment.
 Error history (the frequency/history of errors related with the trouble)
 Temperature/humidity of the installation site
(For the guaranteed environment, see P.14.) 2.1.1.5 Test print check
 Drivers/RIP that the user uses For the trouble related with print quality, carry out “Test Print” and check the current
 Genuine media or 3rd party's media? adjustment status. (For the procedure of test print, see P.260.)
 Genuine ink or 3rd party's ink?

 F/W version (the latest?)
 Check also the following if necessary.
Phenomenon Check Item

The installation site inclined?
Any vibrating equipment near the site?
Bad print quality The user's panel settings
Is the interior dirty?
Clean it if dirty.
Missing dots/bad print quality Near a conditioner's ventilation duct?
TROUBLE SHOOTING Overview 42

2.1.2 Troubleshooting Procedure 2.1.3.2 If necessary to escalate the trouble case

Refer to the following items according to the observed symptom, carry out the Make a report with the following data.
corresponding troubleshooting following the procedures described in the next sections.  Backed-up NVRAM data
1. Trouble with a Maintenance Request or Service Call Error. (See P.44, P. 45)  Firmware version
2. Trouble on print quality (See P.63)
3. Trouble on paper feeding (See P.66)  Service program version
4. Other troubles (See P.67)  For bad print quality: a print sample with the marked symptom and a printed
5. Trouble on Service Program (See P.68) test pattern.
6. Trouble on NVRAM Viewer (See P.69)
 For faulty parts: the faulty parts themselves and a photos of the troubling
section.
2.1.3 Procedure after troubleshooting  Information on the user/the repair listed below
This is a format of the escalation report. At least check out the items on the
2.1.3.1 If the trouble has been successfully solved list and register the case in the escalation system.
 Check if the movement of the covers is normal (without any damage, noises).
If any abnormality is found, lubricate or replace the faulty parts. • Model name
• Serial number
 Carry out the cleaning after repair. • With or without options
 Prepare a report on the repair. (follow your company/local office's policy.) • Content of the claim from the user
• Date of occurrence
• Trouble occurrence conditions/recurrence method
• What the service person actually observed
(Check items before check, the content of troubleshooting and repair.)
• Date of escalation
• Purpose of escalation
(Measures which the user/service person)
• Degree of urgency (S/A/B/C)
S: High (those which may cause a death, ignition, etc.)
A: Problems, bugs
B: Strong request
C: Inquiry
• Deadline for the response
• Repair history
• Part-replacement history
TROUBLE SHOOTING Overview 43

2.2 Remedies for Maintenance Requests

This section describes the remedies for maintenance requests. Maintenance requests do not effect the printer’s operation; therefore, you can continue the current printing. When a
maintenance request error occurs, the printer displays on the LCD a hexadecimal code of “NNNN” which correspond to the bit numbers assigned to error statuses as shown in the
table below.
Table 2-1. List of the Maintenance Requests
Bit assignment (Binary) NNNN
(Hexa- Parts corresponding to the request Status
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
decimal)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 00000001 INK TUBE End of the life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 00000002 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 00000004 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 00000008 RTC battery Out of battery
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 00000010 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 00000020 PUMP CAP UNIT Near the end of life
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000040 Reserved
IC HOLDER (Life of the pump in the ink
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000080 Near the end of life
path)
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000100 RTC Date/time not set
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000200 Reserved
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000400 DAMPER KIT Near the end of life
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000800 Reserved
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001000 IC HOLDER (Life of waste ink pad) Near the end of life
Note : Ex): When “Maintenance Request 00000108” is displayed.
As “00000108” in hexadecimal means “0000000000000000100001000” in binary, you can find out the code is assigned to Bit-3 and Bit-8 referring to the above table. In
this case, two errors are occurring simultaneously. (Bit-3: Out of battery/ Bit-8: the date/time not set.)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Maintenance Requests 44

2.3 Remedies for Service Call Error

The following tables explains the Service Call error messages and remedies.
Table 2-2. Service Call Error

Code Category Error Name Cause Check Item Remedy
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
0001 EMG NMI error CPU detects NMI. ---
P.115)
0002 EMG System error --- ---
P.115)
CR scan pass counter has reached the specified Replace the INK TUBES (See
1101 INK TUBE CR life error value. (which means the INK TUBES have --- P.178) and reset the counter of the
reached the end of their service life.) INK TUBE (See P.261).
1. Replace the CR HP SENSOR.
The CR HP SENSOR cannot detect the CR UNIT. (See P.169)
Or the CR UNIT cannot detect the touching 1. Is the CR HP SENSOR out of order? Does the light shielding 2. Re-install the CR ENCODER.
surface for the home position setting, so the home plate react to the sensor? If it is faulty, replace it. (See
position cannot be set. 2. Is there any paper jammed inside the printer? P.164)
CR HP detection
1125 CR  CR HP SENSOR failure 3. Does the CR SCALE have any scratches or dirt? 3. Clean the CR SCALE using
error
 False detection of the home due to paper jam or 4. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the ethanol.
any other obstacle Service Program. 4. Replace the CR SCALE. (See
 Misreading of CR SCALE 5. Does the CR Lock function normally? P.159)
 CR Lock is damaged. 5. Replace the CR Lock (PUMP
CAP UNIT). (See P.173)
 Connection failure of the CR MOTOR or the
CR ENCODER. 1. Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the
 The number of occurrences of overcurrent to connections below? 1. Replace the CR ENCODER.
the CR MOTOR has reached a predetermined  CR ENCODER to SUB BOARD (CN102) (See P.164)
1138 CR Over current error limit.  CR MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN19) 2. Replace the CR MOTOR. (See
 Irregular load 2. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the P.167)
 CR ENCODER failure Service Program.
 CR MOTOR failure
1. Remove the foreign material.
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the CR 1. Is the CR MOTOR driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1139 CR Oscillation error
MOTOR driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the CR MOTOR driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See
P.115)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Service Call Error 45


1. Check if the CR UNIT is attached correctly.
Overcurrent to the CR MOTOR was detected. 2. Is there any foreign materials on the CR UNIT drive path? 1. Re-install the CR UNIT. (See
 CR ENCODER cable is damaged. 3. Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the P.182)
 CR MOTOR cable is damaged. connections below? 2. Replace the CR ENCODER.
113A CR Overload error
 Irregular load  CR ENCODER to SUB BOARD (CN102) (See P.164)
 CR ENCODER failure  CR MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN19) 3. Replace the CR MOTOR. (See
 CR MOTOR failure 4. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the P.167)
Service Program.
The CR MOTOR was driven at a speed faster than 1. Replace the CR ENCODER.
a predetermined one during deceleration. (See P.164)
 Irregular load Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the 2. Replace the SUB BOARD. (See
113B CR Over speed error
 CR ENCODER failure Service Program. P.119)
 SUB BOARD is damaged. 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 CR MOTOR driver failure (See P.115)
The number of occurrences of reversing the CR 1. Check the following connection and installation direction.
MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit.
 CR ENCODER to SUB BOARD (CN102) 1. Adjust the tension of the CR
 The polarity of CR ENCODER cable is
 CR MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN19) TIMING BELT. (See P.165)
113C CR Reversing error opposite.
2. Check if the tension of the CR TIMING BELT is proper. 2. Replace the CR ENCODER.
 The polarity of CR MOTOR cable is opposite.
3. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the (See P.164)
 Slipping of the teeth of CR TIMING BELT
 CR ENCODER failure
Service Program.
Abnormally-long driving duration of the CR

Driving time-out MOTOR was detected. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
113D CR ---
error  Irregular load P.115)
 Firmware becomes out of control.
The CR MOTOR was driven at a speed 1. Replace the CR ENCODER.
abnormally faster than a predetermined one during (See P.164)
acceleration or deceleration. 2. Replace the CR MOTOR. (See
Velocity deviation  Irregular load Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the P.167)
113E CR
error  CR ENCODER failure Service Program. 3. Replace the SUB BOARD. (See
 CR MOTOR failure P.119)
 SUB BOARD is damaged. 4. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 CR MOTOR driver failure (See P.115)


The CR MOTOR was driven at a speed
1. Are there any problems such as damaged cable in the
abnormally slower than a predetermined one
connections below?
during operation. 1. Replace the CR ENCODER.
 CR ENCODER to SUB BOARD (CN102)
 CR ENCODER cable is damaged. (See P.164)
113F CR Lock error  CR MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN19)
 CR MOTOR cable is damaged. 2. Replace the CR MOTOR. (See
 Irregular load
2. Check if the tension of the CR TIMING BELT is proper.
P.167)
 CR ENCODER failure 3. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the
 CR MOTOR failure
Service Program.

The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the PF 1. Is the PF MOTOR driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1219 PF Oscillation error
MOTOR driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the PF MOTOR driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See
P.115)
Overcurrent to the PF MOTOR was detected.
 PF ENCODER cable is damaged. 1. Replace the PF ENCODER.
 PF MOTOR cable is damaged. Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the (See P.192)
122A PF Overload error
 Irregular load Service Program. 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 PF ENCODER failure (See P.115)
 PF MOTOR failure
The PF MOTOR was driven at a speed faster than 1. Replace the PF ENCODER.
a predetermined one during deceleration. (See P.192)
 PF irregular load Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the 2. Replace the SUB-B BOARD.
122B PF Over speed error
 PF ENCODER failure Service Program. (See P.121)
 SUB-B BOARD is damaged. 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 PF MOTOR driver failure (See P.115)
The number of occurrences of reversing the PF 1. Check the following connection and installation direction.
MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit.
 PF ENCODER to SUB-B BOARD (CN2) 1. Adjust the tension of the PF
 The polarity of PF ENCODER cable is
 PF MOTOR to SUB-B BOARD (CN1) TIMING BELT. (See P.194)
122C PF Reversing error opposite.
2. Check if the tension of the PF TIMING BELT is proper. 2. Replace the PF ENCODER.
 The polarity of PF MOTOR cable is opposite.
3. Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the (See P.192)
 Slipping of the teeth of PF TIMING BELT
 PF ENCODER failure
Service Program.
Abnormally-long driving duration of the PF

122D PF ---


The PF MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally
faster than a predetermined one during 1. Replace the PF ENCODER.
acceleration or deceleration. (See P.192)
Velocity deviation  Irregular load Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the 2. Replace the PF MOTOR. (See
122E PF
error  PF ENCODER failure Service Program. P.189)
 PF MOTOR failure 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 SUB BOARD is damaged. (See P.115)
 PF MOTOR driver failure
The PF MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally
1. Are there any problems such as damaged cable in the
slower than a predetermined one during operation.
connections below? 1. Replace the PF ENCODER.
 PF ENCODER cable disconnection
 PF ENCODER to SUB-B BOARD (CN2) (See P.192)
122F PF Lock error  PF MOTOR cable disconnection
 PF MOTOR to SUB-B BOARD (CN1) 2. Replace the PF MOTOR. (See
 Irregular load
2. Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the P.189)
 PF ENCODER failure
Service Program.
 PF MOTOR failure
1. Turn the power off and then back on. Does the printer recover 1. Replace the HEAD FFC. (See
Head driver
The temperature of the Head driver rises, and has from the error? P.135)
131B --- (transmission gate)
reached a predetermined limit. 2. Is the FFC connected to the connector properly without being 2. Replace the PRINT HEAD.
overheat error
tilted? (See P.133)
The number of PUMP CAP UNIT operation has Replace the PUMP CAP UNIT
1412 PUMP Pump life error reached the specified limit. (The rotation of the --- (See P.173), and reset its counter
pump motor has reached the specified limit.) (See P.261).
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connection
Undetermined Replace the PUMP CAP UNIT
1416 PUMP PUMP CAP UNIT failure below?
position error (See P.173).
 PUMP CAP UNIT to MAIN BOARD (CN14)
 Connection failure of the pump motor or the
pump motor encoder.
 The number of occurrences of overcurrent to Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
the pump motor has reached a predetermined Replace the pump motor encoder
below?
1418 PUMP Overcurrent error limit. and pump motor (PUMP CAP
 Pump motor (pump motor encoder) to MAIN BOARD
UNIT). (See P.173)
 Irregular load (CN14).
 pump motor encoder failure
 pump motor failure
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the pump 1. Is the pump motor driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1419 PUMP Oscillation error
motor driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the pump motor driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See
P.115)


Overcurrent to the pump motor was detected.
 Pump motor encoder cable disconnection Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
Replace the pump motor encoder
 Pump motor cable disconnection below?
141A PUMP Overload error and pump motor (PUMP CAP
 Irregular load  Pump motor (pump motor encoder) to MAIN BOARD
UNIT). (See P.173)
 Pump motor encoder failure (CN14)
 Pump motor failure
The pump motor was driven at a speed faster than 1. Replace the pump motor
a predetermined one during deceleration. encoder (PUMP CAP UNIT).
141B PUMP Over speed error  Irregular load --- (See P.173)
 Pump motor encoder failure 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 Pump motor driver failure (See P.115)
The number of occurrences of reversing the pump
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
motor has reached a predetermined limit.
below? Replace the pump motor encoder
141C PUMP Reversing error  The polarity of pump motor encoder cable is
 Pump motor (pump motor encoder) to MAIN BOARD (PUMP CAP UNIT). (See P.173)
opposite.
(CN14)
 The polarity of pump motor cable is opposite.
Abnormally-long driving duration of the pump
Driving time-out motor was detected. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
141D PUMP ---
The pump motor was driven at a speed abnormally
faster than a predetermined one during 1. Replace the pump motor
acceleration or deceleration. encoder and pump motor
Velocity deviation (PUMP CAP UNIT). (See
141E PUMP  Irregular load ---
error P.173)
 Pump motor encoder failure
2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
(See P.115)
 Pump motor driver failure
The pump motor was driven at a speed abnormally
slower than a predetermined one during operation. Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections Replace the pump motor encoder
below?
141F PUMP Lock error  Irregular load and pump motor (PUMP CAP
 Pump motor (pump motor encoder) to MAIN BOARD
 Pump motor encoder failure UNIT). (See P.173)
(CN14)
Life of the Holder
The number of replacement counter of the ink Replace the IC HOLDER. (See
Holder Ink Ink Pad (IC
1430 cartridges has reached the specified life. (the life --- P.174) and reset its counter (See
Pad HOLDER life
of the waste ink pad attached to the IC HOLDER) P.261).
error)


Life of the pump in The number of IC HOLDER operation has
Replace the IC HOLDER. (See
Pump in the the ink path (IC reached the specified limit. (The motion of the
14B0 --- P.174) and reset its counter (See
ink path HOLDER life pump in the ink path has reached the specified
P.261).
error) limit.)
Replace the DAMPER KIT (See
DAMPER DAMPER KIT The DAMPER KIT has reached its end of
14C0 --- P.127) and reset its counter (See
KIT error specified life.
P.261).
1. Replace the PG SENSOR. (See
P.172)
1. Is the PG SENSOR out of order? Does the light shielding
plate react to the sensor? 2. Replace the APG UNIT. (See
P.170)
PG position When changing the PG, the PG SENSOR could 2. Do the planetary gearing work normally? (Do the planet gears
150C PG 3. Remove any obstacles around
undetectable error not detect the PG position. and outer gears properly engage with each other?)
the CR UNIT home position.
3. Is the CR UNIT out of its home position? (Do the planet gears
The printer changes the PG with
and outer gears properly engage with each other?)
the CR UNIT being at its home
position.
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the APG 1. Is the APG motor driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1519 APG Oscillation error
motor driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the APG motor driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See
P.115)
 Connection failure of the APG motor.
 Overcurrent to the APG motor was detected.
 APG motor cable is damaged. Replace the APG UNIT. (See
151A APG Overload error below?
 Irregular load P.170)
 APG motor (APG encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
 APG encoder failure
 APG motor failure
The APG motor was driven at a speed faster than a
predetermined one during deceleration. 1. Replace APG UNIT. (See
P.170)
151B APG Over speed error  Irregular load ---
 APG encoder failure
(See P.115)
 APG motor driver failure
The number of occurrences of reversing the APG
motor has reached a predetermined limit.
151C APG Reversing error below? Replace APG UNIT. (See P.170)
 The polarity of APG motor cable is opposite.
 APG motor (APG encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
 APG motor failure
Detects that the driving period is irregularly long.
Driving time-out Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
151D APG  Irregular load ---
error P.115)


The APG motor was driven at a speed abnormally
faster than a predetermined one during
acceleration or deceleration. 1. Replace APG UNIT. (See
Velocity deviation P.170)
151E APG  Irregular load ---
error 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 APG encoder failure
(See P.115)
 APG motor failure
 APG motor driver failure
 Connection failure of the APG motor.
 The APG motor was driven at a speed
abnormally slower than a predetermined one Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
151F APG Lock error during operation. below? Replace APG UNIT. (See P.170)
 Irregular load  APG motor (APG encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
 APG encoder failure
 APG motor failure
 Connection failure of the PE SENSOR (Roll
1. Is there any problem such as damaged cable or connection
Paper).
failures in the PE SENSOR (Roll Paper)? (CN17) Replace the PE SENSOR (Roll
1523 ROLL Roll sensor error  The lever of the PE SENSOR (Roll Paper) does
2. Does the lever of the PE SENSOR (Roll Paper) move Paper). (See P.202)
not work correctly or dropped off.
correctly?
 PE SENSOR (Roll Paper) failure
 When detecting the origin of the PRESSURE
ROLLER (to reset the driven roller), the status
1. Replace the PRESSURE
of the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR and the Are there any problems such as damaged cable in the connection
ROLLER SENSOR. (See
Driven Driven roller HP current roller position do not match. below?
1530 P.199)
roller detection error  Connection failure of the PRESSURE  PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR to SUB-B BOARD (CN6)
ROLLER SENSOR 2. Replace the PRESSURE
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR to SUB-B BOARD (CN5)
ROLLER MOTOR. (See P.197)
 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR failure
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR failure
1. Is the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR driver on the MAIN 1. Remove the foreign material.
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the
Driven BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1539 Oscillation error PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR driver has shorted
roller 2. Is there any foreign materials around the PRESSURE the MAIN BOARD. (See
out.
ROLLER MOTOR driver? P.115)


Overcurrent to the PRESSURE ROLLER
MOTOR was detected.
 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR cable is
damaged. Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
Driven  PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR cable is below? Replace the PRESSURE
153A Overload error
roller damaged.  PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR (PRESSURE ROLLER ROLLER MOTOR. (See P.197)
 Irregular load SENSOR) to MAIN BOARD (CN14)
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR encoder
failure
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR failure
The PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR was driven at
1. Replace the PRESSURE
a speed faster than a predetermined one during
ROLLER SENSOR. (See
Driven deceleration.
153B Over speed error --- P.199)
roller  Irregular load
 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR failure
(See P.115)
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR driver failure
The number of occurrences of reversing the
PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR has reached a
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections Replace the PRESSURE
predetermined limit.
Driven below? ROLLER MOTOR encoder cable/
153C Reversing error  The polarity of PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR
roller  PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR (PRESSURE ROLLER PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR.
encoder cable is opposite.
MOTOR encoder cable) to SUB-B BOARD (CN5) (See P.197)
 The polarity of PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR
cable is opposite.
Abnormally-long driving duration of the
Driven Driving time-out PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR was detected. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
153D ---
roller error  Irregular load P.115)
a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined 1. Replace the PRESSURE
one during acceleration or deceleration. ROLLER MOTOR encoder
Driven Velocity deviation  Irregular load cable/PRESSURE ROLLER
153E ---
roller error  PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR encoder MOTOR. (See P.197)
failure 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR failure (See P.115)
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR driver failure


a speed abnormally slower than a predetermined
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections Replace the PRESSURE
one during operation.
Driven below? ROLLER MOTOR encoder cable/
153F Lock error  Irregular load
roller  PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR (PRESSURE ROLLER PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR.
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR encoder
MOTOR encoder cable) to SUB-B BOARD (CN5) (See P.197)
failure
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR failure
The home position of the Cutter is not detected.
 Operation failure due to paper jam 1. Is there any paper jammed around the CUTTER UNIT?
Cutter HP  Connection failure of the CUTTER HOME 2. Is there any problem such as damaged cable or connection Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See
1540 Cutter
detection error POSITION SENSOR. failures in the CUTTER HOME POSITION SENSOR? P.209)
 CUTTER HOME POSITION SENSOR failure (CN16)
 CUTTER MOTOR failure
The Cutter cannot return to its home position.
Is there any problem such as damaged cable or connection Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See
1541 Cutter Cutter return error  Slipping of the teeth of the Cutter Timing Belt
failures in the CUTTER HOME POSITION SENSOR? (CN16) P.209)
 CUTTER HOME POSITION SENSOR failure
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the cutter 1. Is the cutter motor driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1548 Cutter Oscillation error
motor driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the cutter motor driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See
P.115)
 Connection between the SUB-B BOARD and
the MAIN BOARD has an abnormality.
Motor  The CUTTER UNIT operation is not detected.
 Irregular load
Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See
1549 Cutter disconnection below?
P.209)
error  CUTTER MOTOR Assy cable is damaged.  CUTTER MOTOR Assy to MAIN BOARD (CN4, CN301)
 CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure.
 CUTTER MOTOR failure
Overcurrent to the CUTTER MOTOR was
detected.
 CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER cable is Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
damaged. below? Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See
154A Cutter Overload error
 CUTTER MOTOR cable is damaged.  CUTTER MOTOR (CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER) to P.209)
 Irregular load SUB-B BOARD (CN4)
 CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure


The CUTTER MOTOR was driven at a speed 1. Replace the CUTTER UNIT.
faster than a predetermined one during (See P.209)
deceleration. 2. Replace the SUB-B BOARD.
154B Cutter Over speed error ---
 Irregular load (See P.121)
 CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 CUTTER MOTOR driver failure (See P.115)
The number of occurrences of reversing the
CUTTER MOTOR has reached a predetermined
limit.
below? Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See
154C Cutter Reversing error  The polarity of CUTTER MOTOR
 CUTTER MOTOR (CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER) to P.209)
ENCORDER cable is opposite.
SUB-B BOARD (CN4)
 The polarity of CUTTER MOTOR cable is
opposite.
Abnormally-long driving duration of the CUTTER
154D Cutter ---
The CUTTER MOTOR was driven at a speed
1. Replace the CUTTER UNIT.
abnormally faster than a predetermined one during
(See P.209)
acceleration or deceleration.
Velocity deviation 2. Replace the SUB-B BOARD.
154E Cutter  Irregular load ---
error (See P.121)
 CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure
(See P.115)
 CUTTER MOTOR driver failure
The CUTTER MOTOR was driven at a speed
during operation. below? Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See
154F Cutter Lock error
 Irregular load  Cutter motor (CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER) to SUB-B P.209)
 CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure BOARD (CN4)
 During detection of paper thickness, the
thickness cannot be determined because the 1. Check if the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR is secured
Paper Thickness sensor is not stable due to vibration or the like. firmly. Replace the PAPER THICKNESS
1551 Sensor
Sensor error  The PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR is 2. Check if the cable of the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR is SENSOR. (See P.205)
damaged and cannot detect the paper thickness routed correctly and secured with hooks(CN16).
correctly.


1. Check if the paper with the thickness more than 2.2mm is
Paper thickness at At power-on, the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR loaded. Replace the PAPER THICKNESS
1561 ---
power-on error detects more than 2.2mm paper thickness. 2. Check and adjust the position of PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR. (See P.205)
SENSOR. (See P.301)
1. Is the ATC MOTOR driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged?
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the ATC 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1599 ATC Oscillation error 2. Is there any foreign materials around the ATC MOTOR
MOTOR driver has shorted out. the MAIN BOARD. (See
driver?
P.115)
Overcurrent to the ATC MOTOR was detected.
 ATC MOTOR cable disconnection. Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
Replace the ATC MOTOR. (See
159A ATC Overload error  Irregular load below?
P.201)
 ATC MOTOR encoder failure  ATC MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
 ATC MOTOR failure
The ATC MOTOR was driven at a speed faster
1. Replace the ATC MOTOR.
than a predetermined one during deceleration.
(See P.201)
159B ATC Over speed error  Irregular load ---
 ATC MOTOR encoder failure
(See P.115)
 APG MOTOR driver failure
The number of occurrences of reversing the ATC
MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit. Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
Replace the ATC MOTOR. (See
159C ATC Reversing error  The polarity of ATC MOTOR cable is below?
P.201)
opposite.  ATC MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
Abnormally-long driving duration of the ATC
159D ATC ---
The ATC MOTOR was driven at a speed
abnormally faster than a predetermined one during
acceleration or deceleration. 1. Replace the ATC MOTOR.
Velocity deviation (See P.201)
159E ATC  Irregular load ---
error 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 ATC MOTOR encoder failure
(See P.115)
 ATC MOTOR driver failure


 Connection failure of the ATC MOTOR.
 The ATC MOTOR was driven at a speed
during operation. Replace the ATC MOTOR. (See
159F ATC Lock error below?
P.201)
 Irregular load  ATC MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
 ATC MOTOR encoder failure
 ATC MOTOR failure
If the error still occurs after
resetting the date and time,
perform the followings.
Incorrect RTC data The various absolute time settings stored on the Reset the date and time settings of the RTC using the Service
1A23 RTC 1. Replace the RTC backup
error NVRAM are abnormal. Program. (See P.305)
battery.
(See P.115)
1. Turn the power off and remove
the RTC backup battery.
2. After several seconds, re-attach
RTC Access T/O The RTC circuit on the MAIN BOARD the battery and turn the power
1A26 RTC ---
error malfunctions. back on.
3. Reset the date and time settings
of the RTC using the Service
Program. (See P.305)
 The HEAD FFC is not connected correctly. 1. Replace the HEAD FFC. (See
 A temperature out of a predetermined range Is the HEAD FFC connected properly without being connected P.135)
1A37 --- Thermistor error
was detected by the Head thermistor. at an angle and any abnormalities such as peeled terminals? 2. Replace the PRINT HEAD.
 Head thermistor failure (See P.133)
Transistor  Transistor failure
Replace the PRINT HEAD. (See
1A38 Hardware environmental  A temperature out of a predetermined range ---
P.133)
temperature error was detected by the Head thermistor.
 Connection failure of the HEAD FFC.
1. Replace the HEAD FFC. (See
 Electric parts or components are damaged due
P.135)
to improper HEAD FFC connection such as
Is the HEAD FFC connected properly without being connected 2. Replace the PRINT HEAD.
1A39 Hardware Head error connecting it at an angle.
at an angle and any abnormalities such as peeled terminals? (See P.133)
 The drive circuit in the PRINT HEAD is
damaged. 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
(See P.115)
 The fuse of the MAIN BOARD has blown.
Head rank ID An invalid Head rank ID was written to the Rewrite the Head rank ID with a
1A41 --- Check the Head rank ID using the Service Program. (See P.281)
input error NVRAM. correct one. (Page 281)


I2C
communication
An I2C communication error has occurred in the Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
1A50 Hardware error (Between ---
MAIN BOARD. P.115)
elements on ASIC
and MAIN)
1. Replace the CR FFC between
I2C the MAIN BOARD and SUB
Are the MAIN BOARD and SUB BOARD properly connected BOARD. (See P.145)
communication
An I2C communication error between the MAIN to each other without any cable disconnection, FFCs being
1A51 Hardware error (Between 2. Replace the SUB BOARD. (See
BOARD and SUB BOARD has occurred. connected at an angle, and any abnormalities such as peeled
elements on ASIC P.119)
terminals? (CN100)
and SUB) 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
(See P.115)
MAIN to MAIN-B Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connection 1. Update the main firmware to
 Connection between the MAIN BOARD and
BOARD below? the latest version. (See P.259)
1A70 Hardware the MAIN-B BOARD has an abnormality.
communication  MAIN BOARD to MAIN-B BOARD (CN200 to CN1, CN8 2. Replace the MAIN-B BOARD.
 MAIN-B BOARD failure
error to CN5) (See P.117)
1. Update the main firmware to
MAIN-B BOARD
CPU of the MAIN-B BOARD becomes out of Turn the power off and then it back on. Does the printer recover the latest version. (See P.259)
1A71 Hardware system error
control (due to such as firmware failure) from the error? 2. Replace the MAIN-B BOARD.
(Core0)
(See P.117)
1. Update the main firmware to
MAIN-B BOARD
CPU of the MAIN-B BOARD becomes out of Turn the power off and then it back on. Does the printer recover the latest version. (See P.259)
1A72 Hardware system error
control (due to such as firmware failure) from the error? 2. Replace the MAIN-B BOARD.
(Core1)
(See P.117)
 Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connection
MAIN to MAIN-C below?
 Connection between the MAIN BOARD and
BOARD Replace the MAIN-C BOARD.
1A73 Hardware the MAIN-C BOARD has an abnormality.  MAIN BOARD to MAIN-C BOARD (CN500 to CN1,
communication (See P.118)
 MAIN-C BOARD failure CN5 to CN2)
error
 Is the Network firmware the latest version?


Check the resistance between terminals of "F2"fuse on the
MAIN BOARD.
MAIN BOARD
Check Position
Check Posi-
1. If the resistance value of "F2" on the MAIN BOARD is more

than "1Ω",
-> The fuse has blown out. It is necessary to check whether the 1. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 CSIC control error. drive circuit in the PRINT HEAD has broken or not. (See P.115)
CSIC  The drive circuit damage in the Print Head was [Check method] 2. Replace the PRINT HEAD (See
1F80 CSIC error
control caused by the 42V fuse blue out of the Main Pull out the PRINT HEAD FFC from "CN101" on the MAIN P.133)
Board. BOARD, then check the resistance value between "15th" pin 3. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See
and "19th" pin of the FFC terminal. P.174)
-> more than "1MΩ": Go to remedy "1".
-> less than "1MΩ": Go to remedy "1" and "2".
HEAD FFC C A U T IO N
• Be careful to
handling of FFC.
15 19
• Be careful to
electrode
measurement.
2. If the resistance value of "F2" on the MAIN BOARD is less

than "1Ω",
-> The fuse has not blowing out.
Go to remedy "3".


1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See
CSIC P.174)
1F81 CSIC error CSIC control error ---
control 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
(See P.115)
CSIC P.174)
(See P.115)
CSIC P.174)
(See P.115)
CSIC P.174)
(See P.115)
CSIC P.174)
(See P.115)
CSIC P.174)
1FB8 CSIC error CSIC control error ---
(See P.115)
CSIC P.174)
1FB9 CSIC error CSIC control error ---
(See P.115)
CSIC P.174)
1FBE CSIC error CSIC control error ---
(See P.115)
CSIC P.174)
1FBF CSIC error CSIC control error ---
(See P.115)


CSIC P.174)
1FC0 CSIC error CSIC control error ---
(See P.115)
CSIC P.174)
(See P.115)
CSIC P.174)
(See P.115)
CSIC P.174)
(See P.115)
 Running out of disk space of the controlled
domain for print job on the optional HDD Unit.
Storage Controlled domain 1. Replace the optional HDD Unit
1FE0  Integration value of print jobs reached the ---
control full error 2. Replace the whole printer
maximum of the controlled domain on the
optional HDD Unit.
 Optional HDD Unit failure
Storage
1FE1 Invalid lock  Non-support HDD Unit was attached to the Is the attached HDD Unit guaranteed product? Replace the optional HDD Unit
control
printer
Storage Device access
1FE2 Optional HDD Unit failure --- Replace the optional HDD Unit
control error
Turn the power off and then it
 Connection failure of the optional HDD Unit
Storage Is there any problem such as damaged cable or connection back on after checking the
1FE3 Missing device  Communication error between the optional
control failures in the optional HDD Unit? connection of the optional HDD
HDD Unit and the printer Unit.
2000 Memory NVRAM error NVRAM erase or write error has occurred. ---
P.115)
Writing to the SDRAM was attempted, but Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
2002 Memory SDRAM error ---
nothing could be written to it. P.115)
1. Re-install the main firmware.
FLASH BOOT (Page 259)
 Installing the firmware has failed.
2003 Memory SUM CHECK ---
 The Flash ROM is out of order. 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
error
(See P.115)


(Page 259)
200A Memory F/W load error Reading / decompressing the firmware has failed. ---
(See P.115)
System interrupt
A system failure such as CPU failure, or defective Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
200D System watchdog time-out ---
cash has occurred. P.115)
error
1. Replace the PSH BOARD. (See
The AC power has been shut off due to a power P.122)
3000 AC shut-off AC shut-off failure, unplugged, PSH BOARD failure, or Check if the Power cable is correctly connected.
MAIN BOARD failure or the like.
(See P.115)
D184 Replace the SUB BOARD. (See
Debugging Debugging error Communication error of the SUB BOARD below?
D185 P.119)
 MAIN BOARD to SUB BOARD (CN100)
below? Replace the SUB BOARD. (See
S241 Debugging Debugging error The program's image process error
P.119)
 MAIN BOARD to SUB BOARD (CN100)
This error is intended to be used in the product 1. Re-install the main firmware.
Turn the power off and then turn it back on. Does the printer
Service call for development stage. It is supposed to not occur to (Page 259)
Dxxy Debugging recover from the error? (No repair work is needed unless the
FW debugging marketed products, but may occur due to an 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
error occurs again.)
unexpected cause such as external noises. (See P.115)
CPU related (Page 259)
Fxxx CPU There is something wrong with the firmware. Is the firmware installed correct one for the printer?
service call 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
(See P.115)


1. Check the PRESSURE MOTOR operation (After removing
the RIGHT LOWER COVER, check whether the piston
included in the IC HOLDER is moving or not during the
initialization)
1. Replace the pressure unit (IC

Check the piston
HOLDER). (See P.174)
Pressure Pressurizing The initialization process did not complete within movement from this
1620 2. If the error still occurs, replace
motor initialization error a predetermined time period. hole.
the MAIN BOARD. (See
P.115)
2. Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connection

below?
 IC HOLDER to MAIN BOARD (CN14)
the RIGHT LOWER COVER, check whether the piston 1. Replace the pressure unit (IC
Pressurizing/ included in the IC HOLDER is moving or not during the HOLDER). (See P.174)
Pressure The pressurizing and suction processes did not initialization) (See item for SC1620)
1621 Suction switching 2. If the error still occurs, replace
motor complete within a predetermined time period.
error 2. Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connection the MAIN BOARD. (See
below? P.115)
the RIGHT LOWER COVER, check whether the piston 1. Replace the pressure unit (IC
included in the IC HOLDER is moving or not during the HOLDER). (See P.174)
Pressure Operating time-out The switching operation did not complete within a initialization) (See item for SC1620)
1622 2. If the error still occurs, replace
motor error predetermined time period.
2. Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connection the MAIN BOARD. (See
below? P.115)
1. Remove the foreign materials.
1. Is the pressure motor driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged?
Pressure Continuous The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the pressure 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1623 2. Is there any foreign materials around the pressure motor
motor revolution error motor driver has shorted out. the MAIN BOARD. (See
driver?
P.115)
Interlock switch 1. Various Service Call Errors are displayed in turn
1. Replace the INTERLOCK
**** Sensor communication Communication failure due to broken cables. inconsistently. (e.g.: 1138 => 1411 => 1418 => 150C, etc.)
SWITCH. (See P.113)
error 2. Is the cable of the INTERLOCK SWITCH broken?

2.4 Remedies for Print Quality Troubles

This section provides troubleshooting of print quality troubles classifying them by observed symptom. Before performing troubleshooting, refer to “Nozzle Check” (p283) and print
nozzle check pattern. Examine the printed pattern, and if any missing segment is found, perform the PRINT HEAD cleaning.
Table 2-3. Print Quality Troubles

Symptom Cause Check Item Remedy
The Wiper is contaminated and wiping 1. Is the Wiper or Wiper Cleaner contaminated? 1. Clean the Wiper.
the PRINT HEAD cannot be performed
2. Is the Wiper or Wiper Cleaner damaged? 2. Replace the Wiper and Wiper Cleaner.
properly.
1. Clean the Cap.
The Head Cap is contaminated. Is the Cap contaminated? 2. Replace the Cap (PUMP CAP UNIT). (See
P.173)
There is some foreign material on the
Is there any foreign materials on the PRINT HEAD? Clean the PRINT HEAD.
PRINT HEAD.
There is something wrong in the pump
Is the pump tube being bent or getting caught between
The nozzles are still clogging after tube and the cleaning (suctioning of Route the pump tube correctly.
surrounding parts or components?
cleaning. ink) cannot be performed properly.
The ink is leaking. Is there any ink leakage observed on the ink flow paths? If any leakage is found, correct it.
There is air inside the ink path. Is there any air bubbles observed in the ink flow paths? Run a head cleaning. (Page 284)
1. Reconnect the HEAD FFC.
Is the HEAD FFC connected properly without being
The HEAD FFC is not connected
connected at an angle and any abnormalities such as peeled 2. If the trouble still occurs, the cause may be
correctly. breaking of the HEAD FFC. Replace the HEAD
terminals?
FFC. (See P.135)
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the following parts one by one.
 PRINT HEAD (See P.133)
 MAIN BOARD (The fuse may have blown) (See P.115)
Carry out the following adjustments.
 Auto Bi-D adjustment (Page 274)
Adjustment failure of the IM SENSOR ---
 Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto Adjustment
(Page 270)
Does the IM SENSOR function normally? Check it using
IM SENSOR is out of order. Replace the IM SENSOR. (See P.185)
the Service Program.
Horizontal or vertical lines look
Carry out the adjustments correctly.
misaligned.
Have the following adjustments been made properly?  Head inclination adjustment (CR direction)
The PRINT HEAD has not been
 Head inclination auto adjustment (CR direction) (Page 285)
adjusted properly.
 Head slant auto adjustment (PF direction)  Head slant adjustment (PF direction) (Page
289)
1. Is the paper thickness setting correct? 1. Correct the paper thickness setting.
Improper PG adjustment
2. Has the PG adjustment been made properly? 2. Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 277)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Print Quality Troubles 63


 Head inclination adjustment (CR direction)
The PRINT HEAD has not been
--- (Page 285)
adjusted properly.
 Head slant adjustment (PF direction) (Page
289)
Carry out the following adjustment.
 Media Feed Auto Adjustment
The paper was not fed properly. --- Check the following settings.
Bandings in the paper feeding direction.  Feed Adjustment
 Media Tension
1. Clean the PF SCALE.
1. Is the PF SCALE damaged or contaminated?
2. Reinstall the PF SCALE and PF ENCODER.
PF SCALE or PF ENCODER failure 2. Is the PF SCALE attached properly?
3. Replace the PF SCALE (See P.191) and PF
3. Is the PF ENCODER installed correctly?
ENCODER (See P.192).
The tension of the PF TIMING BELT is Correct the tension of the PF TIMING BELT.
---
not proper. (Page 295)
PF MOTOR failure --- Replace the PF MOTOR. (See P.189)
 Auto Bi-D adjustment (Page 274)
Adjustment failure of the IM SENSOR ---
 Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto Adjustment
(Page 270)
1. Is the paper thickness setting correct? 1. Correct the paper thickness setting.
Improper PG adjustment
2. Has the PG adjustment been made properly? 2. Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 277)
1. Clean the CR SCALE.
1. Is the CR SCALE damaged or contaminated?
2. Reinstall the CR SCALE and CR ENCODER.
Bandings in the carriage movement CR SCALE or CR ENCODER failure 2. Is the CR SCALE attached properly?
direction. 3. Replace the CR SCALE (See P.159) and CR
3. Is the CR ENCODER installed correctly?
The tension of the CR TIMING BELT Correct the tension of the CR TIMING BELT.
---
is not proper. (Page 265)
1. Is there any slack in the loaded paper?
 Suction setting failure 1. Make the suction setting properly.
2. Does the SUCTION FAN work normally? Check it
 SUCTION FAN failure 2. Replace the SUCTION FAN. (See P.212)
using the Service Program.
Lubrication on the CR moving parts is
Has the oil pad of the CR UNIT dried out? If the pad is dry, lubricate it. (See P.323)
insufficient.


1. Is the paper wrinkled, bent, rippled, or warped? 1. Replace the paper with a new proper one.
There is a problem with the paper used. 2. Is the paper too thick and contacting with the head? 2. Adjust the PG setting according to the paper
Printed side is smudged or smeared with 3. Is the paper too thin and loosening when being fed? thickness.
ink. Improper PG adjustment Has the PG adjustment been made properly? Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 277)
The PF (Paper Feed) Roller is
Is the PF roller smudged or smeared with ink or anything? Clean the roller. Print some blank pages to clean it.
contaminated
1. Clean the platen.
1. Is the platen contaminated with ink?
The platen is contaminated. 2. Enable (select “ON”) the Paper Size Check
The backside of paper is smudged or 2. Is the Paper Size Check function enabled?
function.
smeared with ink.
Suction Fan is making the ink mists
Is the suction level of the fan proper? Change the suction level appropriately.
drift to the back of the printing paper.
The ink in the ink cartridge is not Shake the ink cartridges so that ink droplets spread
---
Color or print density unevenness within a agitated enough. evenly inside the cartridges.
page or across pages. Deterioration of ink quality Have the installed ink cartridges expired? Replace the expired ink cartridges with new ones.
Improper PG adjustment Has the PG adjustment been made properly? Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 277)
Rewrite the Head rank ID with a correct one. (Page
Blurred print Too much ink discharge. Has the Head rank ID been written correctly?
281)
Traces of Pressure Roller are caused
Remove the paper if the printer is left for a long
because the paper had been kept set in ---
Paper dust is attached or the traces of the time.
the printer for a long time.
rollers appear.
The paper dust attached on the PF Clean the rollers. Print some blank pages to clean
Is there any paper dust attached to the PF rollers?
rollers transferred to the paper. them.

2.5 Trouble on Paper Feeding

This section describes the possible troubles on paper feeding and their causes and remedies.
Table 2-4. Trouble on Paper Feeding

Improper PE SENSOR adjustment --- Perform the Rear AD Adjustment. (Page 303)
Paper is not fed into the printer properly. Does the PE SENSOR work normally? Check it using the
PE SENSOR failure Replace the PE SENSOR. (See P.202)
Service Program.
1. Clean the PF SCALE.
1. Is the PF SCALE damaged or contaminated?
2. Reinstall the PF SCALE and PF ENCODER.
PF SCALE or PF ENCODER failure 2. Is the PF SCALE attached properly?
3. Replace the PF SCALE (See P.191) and PF
3. Is the PF ENCODER installed correctly?
Paper feeding or paper ejecting is The tension of the PF TIMING BELT is Correct the tension of the PF TIMING BELT.
---
abnormal. not proper. (Page 295)
1. Is the suction setting proper?
 Suction setting failure 1. Make the suction setting properly.
2. Does the SUCTION FAN work normally? Check it
 SUCTION FAN failure 2. Replace the SUCTION FAN.
using the Service Program.
PF rollers failure Are the PF rollers contaminated or damaged? Clean the rollers or replace them.
The Paper Skew Check function has Enable (select “ON”) the Paper Skew Check
---
been disabled. function.
The Paper Size Check function has Enable (select “ON”) the Paper Size Check
---
been disabled. function.
Does the PW SENSOR work normally? Check it using the
Paper is skewing. The PW SENSOR is not working. Replace the PW SENSOR. (See P.187)
Service Program.
Roll paper edge is attached to the take-
--- Attach the paper to the take-up reel correctly.
up reel at an angle.
The paper hold-down plate is pressing Align the holes on the plate with the edges of
---
paper too strong. paper.
Paper feed amount is not configured Perform the Media Feed Auto Adjustment. (Page
---
correctly. 298)
Actual margins differ from the specified
margins. Enable (select “ON”) the Paper Size Check
The Paper Size Check function has
--- function. (The printer is not capable of precisely
been disabled.
correcting less than 2 mm differences.)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on Paper Feeding 66

2.6 Other Troubles

Table 2-5. Other Troubles
The power cable is unplugged Is the power plug connected properly? Connect it properly.
Is the electrical outlet overloaded sharing with any other Use one electrical outlet for the printer only if
The power voltage is unstable.
electric equipment? possible.
Is there any problem in the connection between the PSH
Connection failure of the PSH BOARD Correct the problem.
BOARD and the MAIN BOARD?
The printer is not powered.
Connection failure of the PANEL Is there any problem in the connection between the
Correct the problem.
BOARD PANEL BOARD and the MAIN BOARD?
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the following parts one by one.
 AC inlet
 PSH BOARD (See P.122)
A wrong type of network cable is used. Is a crossing cable used as the network cable? Replace the cable with a straight cable.
Is there any abnormalities observed on the cable?
 Are the connectors firmly inserted?
Network cable failure  Is the cable breaking? Correct the problem.
 Is the cable being bent or is there anything placed on the
Cannot access to the network. cable?
LAN connector failure Is the connector deformed or damaged? Replace the MAIN-C BOARD.
The MAC address is invalid. --- Rewrite the address with a correct one. (Page 306)
Connection failure of the MAIN-C Is there any problem in the connection between the MAIN-
Correct the problem.
BOARD C BOARD and the MAIN BOARD?
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the MAIN-C BOARD. (See P.118)
The tension of the CR TIMING BELT Correct the tension of the CR TIMING BELT.
---
is not proper. (Page 265)
Lubrication of the CR UNIT and CR Does the CR UNIT move smoothly? Check it by pulling
If the unit does not move smoothly, lubricate it.
shaft is insufficient. the CR TIMING BELT.
1. Clean the CR SCALE.
The printer makes a strange noise when the 1. Is the CR SCALE damaged or contaminated?
2. Reinstall the CR SCALE and CR ENCODER.
CR is moving. CR SCALE or CR ENCODER failure 2. Is the CR SCALE attached properly?
3. Replace the CR SCALE (See P.159) and CR
3. Is the CR ENCODER installed correctly?
Unexpected tension was applied to the
Is the resin film on the CR FFC attached properly? Attach the resin film properly.
tubes.
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the CR MOTOR. (See P.167)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Other Troubles 67

2.7 Trouble on Service Program

This section describes possible troubles on Service Program and their causes and remedies.
Table 2-6. Troubles on Service Program

Are you running the program on the following operating
Run the program on the supported operating
The operating system is not supported. systems?
systems.
 Supported OS: Windows XP SP3, Windows 7
The printer is not connected to the Is there any problem with the connection between the
Connect them properly.
computer properly. printer and computer?
If the program still does not start, the program files
There is something wrong with the Try with another computer. Does the program start
Service Program does not start may be broken. Download the set of program files
program file. normally?
again.
Did you get the program through the official channel?
Registration information of the program Download the program file including security files
Check it with the license agreement displayed at the start-
is wrong. through the official channel.
up screen.
More than one printers are connected to Is there any printer connected to the USB port on the Disconnect the printer which is not necessary for
the computer. computer other than the one for adjustment? the adjustment.
 The printer is turned off.
1. Is the printer powered on? 1. Turn the printer on.
 The printer is in a status that cannot
The printer does not react to the program 2. Is there any error occurring on the printer? 2. Correct the printer errors.
accept the program command.
command.
After the USB ID is changed, the 1. Is the printer powered on?
Select the printer (USB port) correctly.
printer has not been reselected. 2. Is there any error occurring on the printer?
The printer is connected with a USB
MAC address cannot be set. --- Connect the printer with a network cable.
cable.
The selected adjustment does not
“Remove paper” error require printing, but paper is loaded on --- Remove the paper from the printer.
the printer.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on Service Program 68

2.8 Trouble on NVRAM Viewer

This section describes possible troubles on NVRAM Viewer and their causes and remedies.
Table 2-7. Trouble on NVRAM Viewer

With a text editor, open the ini file (ServPrg.ini) in the
The button to open the NVRAM Viewer is NVRAM Viewer function is set to Adjust the setting according to the policy of each
“Common” folder of the Service Program, and check the
not displayed. Hide. local sales subsidiary.
setting status of the NVRAM Viewer. (0 = Hide, 1 = Show)
The contents and the items displayed in the
The Service Program you are running is
NVRAM Viewer do not match with each Are you running the Service Program for this product? Use the proper Service Program for this product.
different one.
other.
History of the error and the counter
Click the “Send as CSV” button on the lower right
History of the error and the counter reset reset are shown only as a CSV file. It
--- NVRAM Viewer screen to output the CSV file.
are not displayed on the NVRAM Viewer. will not be shown in the Viewer,
These histories are recorded in this file.
because they have too many items.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on NVRAM Viewer 69

CHAPTER
3
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY

3.1 Overview 3.1.1 Precautions

Before starting the disassembly or reassembly of the product, read the following
This chapter describes procedures for disassembling the main components of SC-
precautions given under the headings “WARNING” and “CAUTION”.
S30600 Series.
Be sure to follow the steps when disassembling the unit.  When the PRINTR COVER is opened, a safety-interlock
W A R N IN G
Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be reassembled by mechanism causes the CR MOTOR and the PF MOTOR to
reversing the disassembly procedure. stop. When the interlock function is disabled, be sure to take
 WARNING safety precautions and turn the function back to enabled after
Procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury are the operation.
described under the heading “WARNING”.  This printer is equipped with a lithium battery. When handling
the lithium battery, the following precautions should be
 CAUTION
followed.
“CAUTION” signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to
• When replacing the battery, replace it only with a specified
equipment.
type of battery. Using a different type of battery may cause
 CHECK POINT excess heat or explosion.
Important tips for procedures are described under the heading “CHECK POINT”. Recommended battery: CR2032 (Sony)
• Dispose of used batteries according to manufacture’s
 REASSEMBLY
If the assembly procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure, instructions and local regulations. Contact your local
the correct procedure is described under the heading “REASSEMBLY”. government agency for information about battery disposal
and recycling.
 ADJUSTMENT • When disposing of the battery, be sure to securely cover its
Any adjustments required after reassembly of components or parts are described (+) end with tape to prevent combustion or explosion.
under the heading “ADJUSTMENT”. Be sure to perform the specified • Do not recharge the battery.
adjustments with reference to Chapter 4 “ADJUSTMENT”. • Do not use the battery if it is discolored or damaged, or if any
 LUBRICATION leakage of electrolyte is observed.
“LUBRICATION” signals that the part needs to be lubricated when replacing or • Do not dismantle, solder or heat the battery. Doing so could
maintaining it after disassembling. result in leakage of electrolyte, heat generation, or explosion.
• Do not heat the battery or dispose of it in fire.
C H E C K The disassembly/assembly procedures are provided based on SC- • If the electrolyte leaked from the battery contacts with your
P O IN T T7000 series. The procedures for SC-T5000 series/SC-T3000 series skin or gets into your eyes, rinse it off with clean water and
are basically the same unless otherwise specified. see a doctor immediately.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Overview 71

 The power switch for this printer is installed on the secondary C A U T IO N  Locate the printer on a stable and flat surface.
side of the power circuit; therefore, the power is always  Use only recommended tools for disassembly, assembly or
supplied unless the AC Cable is unplugged. To prevent electric adjustment of the printer.
shock and circuit damage during servicing, make sure to follow  Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified.
the instructions below.  Be careful not to soil the printer or the floor with the leaked ink
• Before removing a circuit board, make sure to unplug the when removing the ink-path-related components or parts.
AC Cable from the AC outlet and confirm the LEDs are Spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the floor in advance.
turned off by pressing the Power button on the Operating  Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the
Panel. This operation discharges the residual charge in the elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily
printer. damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards
• Make sure not to place the removed circuit boards on the with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such
metal and such directly. as anti-static wrist straps.
 Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid  When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed,
injury from sharp metal edges. take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in
 Never touch the ink or wasted ink with bare hands. If ink comes moving parts.
into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap and water  When you have to remove any parts or components that are
immediately. If irritation occurs, contact a physician. provided as after-service-parts but are not described in this
 If ink gets in your eye, flush the eye with fresh water and see a chapter, carefully observe how they are installed and make
doctor immediately. sure to remember it before removing them.
 When replacing the MAIN BOARD, PSH BOARD, or Power  Disassembling the frame and some components (platen, PF
harnesses and such, make sure to check visually if any harness shaft) of the printer is prohibited because they are assembled
is caught in between or any wrong connection exists. with precise measurements in 1/100 mm unit at the factory.

3.1.2 Cautions after assembling 3.1.3 Orientation Definition

The terms used for indicating the orientation/direction throughout this chapter are as
C A U T IO N  The ink-path-related components or parts should be firmly and
follows.
securely reinstalled on the printer to prevent the ink from
leakage.
 When reassembling the printer, make sure to connect the Up
connectors of the electric components or parts correctly and
securely. Use extreme care when connecting FFCs (flexible flat
cables). Improper connection of the FFCs, such as inserting
them diagonally into the connectors, could cause short-
circuiting and lead to breakdown of the electric elements on the
boards.
 When reassembling the printer, make sure to route the FFCs Left Rear
and other cables as specified in this chapter. Failure to do so Full side
may cause an unexpected contact of the cables with sharp metal
edges, or lead to lower the noise immunity.
 When you removed any parts (especially cables) that are
Front
secured with acetate tape or two-sided tape, be sure to reinstall
and secure them with the tape as exactly the same as they were. Right
Home side
Down
Figure 3-1. Orientation Definition

3.1.4 Recommended Tools

To protect this product from damage, use the tools indicated in the following table. For
the tools required to perform the adjustment, refer to “Tools/Consumables for
Adjustments” in Chapter 4.
Table 3-1. Tools

・
Name Description Target Part

4 cm or longer shaft length (The
 PRINT HEAD
Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 one with a magnet is
 Some encoders/sensors
recommended)
25 cm or longer shaft length (The
Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 one with a magnet is Parts in general
recommended)
Tweezers Nothing in particular Parts in general
To secure the cable/harness, or for Parts in general (Use this tape
Acetate tape the protection against the sharp when it is removed or when
edge replacing the part)
 INKTUBE
 IC HOLDER
To prevent staining the printer
Waste cloth  DUMPER KIT
with ink during operation
 PRINT HEAD
 PUMP CAP UNIT

3.2 Parts Diagram

 REAR LEFT LOWER  PRINTER COVER (p. 97)
COVER (p. 108)
 UPPER LEFT COVER

(p. 104)  TOP COVER (p. 89)
 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT

ROLL COVER (p. 105)  REAR ROLL COVER FRAME (p. 109)
 LEFT LOWER COVER  UPPER SUPPORT R COVER (p. 98)

(p. 102)
 RIGHT UPPER COVER

& RIGHT ROLL
 LEFT BASE COVER (p. 106) COVER (p. 99)
 REAR RIGHT LOWER

 FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER COVER (p. 103)
(p. 107)
 LOWER PAPER GUIDE

(p. 91)
 RIGHT LOWER COVER
(p. 100)
 WASTE INK TANK COVER
(p. 96)
 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B  FRONT COVER  RIGHT BASE COVER (p. 101)
(p. 92) (p. 90)
 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B

(p. 92)  LOWER PAPER GUIDE
(p. 91)
 WASTE INK TANK COVER  IH COVER (p. 93)

(p. 96)
Figure 3-2. Housing
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Parts Diagram 75

 L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR

(p. 112)
Detects the Open/Closed status of the
WASTE INK TANK COVER (L).
 INTERLOCK SWITCH (p. 113)

PRINTER COVER.
 R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR

(p. 111)
WASTE INK TANK COVER (R).  CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR
(p. 110)
Cartridge Cover.
Figure 3-3. Cover sensors

 SUB-B BOARD (p. 121)

Relays the connection between the MAIN BOARD and electric parts
 SUB BOARD (p. 119) components. See “6.2 Connection Diagram (p329)” for specific connections
to the concerning parts/components.
Relays the connection between the MAIN BOARD and
electric parts/components. See “6.2 Connection Diagram
(p329)” for specific connections to the concerning parts/
components.
 PANEL BOARD (p. 124)
 MAIN BOARD (p. 115)

• Communicates with the computer.
• Processes received data.
• Controls the printer mechanism.
• Stores the correction values and
various counters.
 BOARD BOX FAN (p. 211)

Cools the air inside the Board Box.
 MAIN-B BOARD (p. 117)

 MAIN-C BOARD (p. 118) Relays the connection between the MAIN
Communicates across a network. BOARD and the HDD (option).
 PSH BOARD (p. 122)

Generates the DC voltage for this printer
from the AC power supply.
Figure 3-4. Electric Circuit Components

 PW SENSOR (p. 187)

 DAMPER KIT (p. 127)
Detects the width of paper on the platen. This is a reflective photo
interrupter and detects the difference of the amount of reflection between
paper (white) and the platen (black).
 IM SENSOR (p. 185)
Reads print patterns in the following adjustments.
•Auto Bi-D adjustment •IMS position adjustment
•Auto Uni-D adjustment •IMS inspection
•Roll paper remaining •Head inclination adjustment
amount detection •Head slant adjustment
•Auto PF adjustment
•IMS sensitivity adjustment
 CR SCALE (p. 159)
 CR ENCODER (p. 164)  HEAD FFC (p. 135) (x2)
Detects the pattern of the CR
SCALE to control the position of  SHEET ASSY (p. 150)
the CR UNIT.
 PG SENSOR (p. 172)  PRINT HEAD

Detects the origin position of the (p. 133)
platen gap.  CR TIMMING BELT
(p. 165)
 CR FFC (p. 145)

 CR COVER (p. 126)
 CR UNIT (p. 182)
 CR MOTOR (p. 167)  CR HP SENSOR (p. 169)

 APG UNIT (p. 170)
The motor to drive the CR UNIT. Detects the home position of the CR UNIT.
Figure 3-5. Carriage Mechanism

 PUMP CAP UNIT (p. 173)

Includes the wiper section and the
sucking section, and maintains the
PRINT HEAD.
 IC HOLDER (p. 174)

Stores ink cartridges and includes the
 INK TUBE (p. 178) following mechanism and parts.
•Pressure mechanism (Sensor/Motor)
•Ink Level Sensor
•CRCM Board
Figure 3-6. Ink System Mechanism

 ATC MOTOR (p. 201)

Feeds forward (normal rotation) and
 CUTTER UNIT (p. 209)
rewinds (reverse rotation) the roll
paper to generate back tension.
* ATC: Auto Tension Control
 PRESSURE ROLLER (p. 196)
 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR

 PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR (p. 199)
(p. 205) Detects nipping/releasing status of
Detects the thickness of roll paper the PRESSURE ROLLER.
being inserted into the printer.
 PF TIMING BELT (p. 194)

 PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER) (p.
202)
Detects the roll paper and cut sheet.
 PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER)

(p. 203)
Detects the thick paper.
 PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT

(p. 206)
 PF SCALE (p. 191)
 SUCTION FAN (p. 212)

 PF ENCODER (p. 192)
Sucks paper to the platen so as to stabilize the
position of paper when printing. Detects the PF Scale patterns to
control the paper feeding (operation of
the PF MOTOR).
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR

(p. 197)
Makes the PRESSURE ROLLER
nip or release the media.
 PF MOTOR (p. 189)
The motor to drive the Feed Roller.
Figure 3-7. Paper Feed Mechanism / Cutter

 TAKE-UP REEL COVER (p. 213)
 TAKE-UP REEL
LED (p. 215)
 TAKE-UP REEL
SWITCH (p. 216)
 TAKE-UP REEL PS
 TAKE-UP REEL BOARD (p. 218)
SENSOR (p. 214)
 TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
(p. 222)
 TAKE-UP REEL
MOTOR (p. 220)
Figure 3-8. Auto Take-up Reel

3.3 Disassembly Flowchart
HOUSING
Start
“3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER “3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B “3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R
(p104)” “3.4.2.7 PRINTER COVER (p97)”
(p92)” COVER (p98)”
“3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R “3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE

COVER (p98)” (p91)”
“3.4.3.7 PANEL BOARD (p124)” “3.4.2.6 WASTE INK TANK

COVER (p96)”
“3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p89)” “3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p90)”
“3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & “3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p90)”

RIGHT ROLL COVER (p99)”
“3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p90)” “3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER “3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER “3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER &
COVER (p103)” (p100)” LEFT ROLL COVER (p105)”
“3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER “3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE “3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER “3.4.2.11 RIGHT BASE COVER “3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER
(p100)” (p91)” (p100)” (p101)” COVER (p108)”
“3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p93)” “3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B “3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p90)” “3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER
(p92)” (p102)”
“3.4.2.20 CARTRIDGE COVER “3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER “3.4.2.23 INTERLOCK SWITCH “3.4.2.16 LEFT BASE COVER “3.4.2.17 FRONT LEFT LOWER “3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE
SENSOR (p110)” (p100)” (p113)” (p106)” COVER (p107)” (p91)”
“3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p93)” “3.4.2.22 L WASTE INK COVER

SENSOR (p112)”
“3.4.2.21 R WASTE INK COVER

SENSOR (p111)”
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Disassembly Flowchart 82

ELECTRIC CIRCUIT COMPONENTS / FANS
Start
“3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER “3.4.7.2 SUCTION FAN (p212)” “3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R
(p104)” COVER (p98)”
“3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R “3.4.3.7 PANEL BOARD (p124)”

COVER (p98)”
“3.4.3.7 PANEL BOARD (p124)”
“3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p89)”

“3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER “3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER &

COVER (p103)” LEFT ROLL COVER (p105)”
“3.4.3.6 PSH BOARD (p122)” “3.4.3.5 SUB-B BOARD (p121)” “3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER &
“3.4.3.2 MAIN-B BOARD (p117)” “3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit

(p87)”
“3.4.3.3 MAIN-C BOARD (p118)” “3.4.3.1 MAIN BOARD (p115)” “3.4.4.1 CR COVER (p126)”
“3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN “3.4.3.4 SUB BOARD (p119)”

(p211)”

CARRIAGE MECHANISM / INK SYSTEM MECHANISM
Start
“3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p90)”
“3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER “3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER &

(p104)” LEFT ROLL COVER (p105)”
“3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R “3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER &

COVER (p98)” RIGHT ROLL COVER (p99)”
“3.4.3.7 PANEL BOARD (p124)” “3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit

(p87)”
“3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p89)” “3.4.4.1 CR COVER (p126)” “3.4.4.7 CR SCALE (p159)”
“3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & “3.4.4.2 DAMPER KIT (p127)” “3.4.4.6 SHEET ASSY (p150)” “3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER
RIGHT ROLL COVER (p99)” (p100)”
“3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p90)” “3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER “3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit “3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER “3.4.4.3 PRINT HEAD (p133)” “3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER “3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p93)”
COVER (p103)” (p87)” (p100)” COVER (p103)”
“3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER “3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER “3.4.4.12 APG UNIT (p170)” “3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER “3.4.4.16 INK TUBE (p178)”
(p100)” “3.4.4.11 CR HP SENSOR (p169)”
(p100)” (p100)”
“3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p93)” “3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit “3.4.4.12 APG UNIT (p170)” “3.4.4.12 APG UNIT (p170)” “3.4.4.4 HEAD FFC (p135)” “3.4.4.5 CR FFC (p145)”
(p87)”
“3.4.4.15 IC HOLDER (p174)” “3.4.4.14 PUMP CAP UNIT “3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit “3.4.4.10 CR MOTOR (p167)”
(p173)” (p87)”
“3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & “3.4.4.7 CR SCALE (p159)”

LEFT ROLL COVER (p105)”
“3.4.4.10 CR MOTOR (p167)” “3.4.4.17 CR UNIT (p182)”
“3.4.4.8 CR ENCODER (p164)” “3.4.4.13 PG SENSOR (p172)” “3.4.4.18 IM SENSOR (p185)”
“3.4.4.9 CR TIMMING BELT “3.4.4.19 PW SENSOR (p187)”

(p165)”

PAPER FEED MECHANISM / CUTTER
Start
“3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER “3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER

(p104)” FRAME (p109)”
“3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R “3.4.5.9 PE SENSOR (ROLL

COVER (p98)” PAPER) (p202)”
“3.4.3.7 PANEL BOARD (p124)”
“3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p89)”

“3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p90)” “3.4.5.8 ATC MOTOR (p201)” “3.4.5.11 PAPER THICKNESS “3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & “3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER “3.4.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER
SENSOR (p205)” LEFT ROLL COVER (p105)” FRAME (p109)” (p196)”
“3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & “3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER “3.4.5.10 PE SENSOR (THICK “3.4.5.12 PF ROLLER MIDDLE
LEFT ROLL COVER (p105)” COVER (p108)” PAPER) (p203)” SUPPORT (p206)”
“3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER “3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER

(p102)” (p102)”
“3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER “3.4.5.3 PF ENCODER (p192)” “3.4.5.6 PRESSURE ROLLER “3.4.5.1 PF MOTOR (p189)”
(p100)” MOTOR (p197)”
“3.4.2.17 FRONT LEFT LOWER “3.4.5.2 PF SCALE (p191)” “3.4.5.4 PF TIMING BELT “3.4.5.7 PRESSURE ROLLER
COVER (p107)” (p194)” SENSOR (p199)”
“3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p93)” “3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE

(p91)”
“3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B

(p92)” “3.4.6.1 CUTTER UNIT (p209)”

AUTO TAKE-UP REEL (SC-T7050 SERIES ONLY)
Start
“3.4.8.1 TAKE-UP REEL “3.4.8.2 TAKE-UP REEL

COVER (p213)” SENSOR (p214)”
“3.4.8.3 TAKE-UP REEL “3.4.8.4 TAKE-UP REEL “3.4.8.5 TAKE-UP REEL “3.4.8.6 TAKE-UP REEL “3.4.8.7 TAKE-UP REEL
LED (p215)” SWITCH (p216)” PS BOARD (p218)” MOTOR (p220)” MAIN BOARD (p222)”

3.4 Disassembly and Assembly Procedure  Manual (1)
1. Remove the screw, and remove the cover from the RIGHT UPPER COVER.
This section describes procedures for disassembling the components allowed to be
disassembled. Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with captive washer: 1 pcs
reassembled by reversing the disassembly procedure. 2. Insert a screwdriver into the cover through the hole as shown in the figure.
3. Turn the whiteshaft of the PUMP CAP UNIT counterclockwise with the driver
3.4.1 Preparation for servicing until click sound when the CR is unlocked occurs.
3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit
C A U T IO N
No clock
rotation!
C A U T IO N When you have unlocked the CR Unit and finished your
reassembly work, move the CR Unit (Print Head) over the platen
and turn the printer on to let it perform the initialization sequence. Cover A
(By this sequence, the CR Unit is locked and Print Head is capped.)
If the initialization is performed on or over the Cap, the Print Head
may be damaged.
 Automatic
1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Figure 3-9. Unlocking the CR Unit (1)
Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu], [Back] and [OK] buttons together.
2. Select Mecha Adjustment - CR Un Cap. C A U T IO N Do not turn the white shaft clockwise with the driver.
3. Press the [OK] button while [Enter] Un Cap is displayed.

The carriage unit is unlocked.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Procedure 87

 Manual (2) C A U T IO N
No clock
rotation!
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104)
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p98)
3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p124)
PUMP CAP
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p89) UNIT
5. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p99)
6. Insert a screwdriver into the cover through the hole as shown in the figure.
7. While viewing the CR Lock Lever status from the front of the printer, turn the Screwdrive
white shaft of the Pump Cap Unit counterclockwise with the driver.
8. The CR Lock Lever is lowered. Check that the lever reaches the CR unlock
position, and stop turning the white shaft.
Insert driver here
C A U T IO N Do not turn the white shaft clockwise with the driver.
Figure 3-10. Unlocking the CR Unit (2)
CR Lock Lever
C H E C K  When the CR is unlocked, it clicks.

P O IN T  Use a screwdriver with a 170 mm or longer shaft.
CR unlocked CR locked
(The Lever is lowered) (The lever is raised)
Figure 3-11. Status of the CR Lock Lever

3.4.2 Housing
Positioning point
3.4.2.1 TOP COVER
A
3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p124) Upper Support
Frame
4. Remove the screw, and remove the TOP COVER.
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
TOP COVER
5. Remove the PRINTER COVER. (p97)
Pay attention to the positioning points (See Figure 3-12).
Figure 3-12. Removing the TOP COVER

3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER

1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) PRINTER COVER
4. Open the PRINTER COVER. A A A A A
5. Remove the seven screws, and remove the FRONT COVER.

To ensure the INTERLOCK SWITCH can detect the flag of

PRINTER COVE, tighten the screws which secure the FRONT FRONT COVER
COVER while pulling the Front Frame toward you.
Figure 3-13. Removing the FRONT COVER
Front Frame
INTERLOCK SWITCH

3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE

1. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B. (p92)
2. Open the WASTE INK TANK COVER. LOWER PAPER GUIDE
3. Remove the three screws, and remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE.
 To ensure the tab of WASTE INK TANK COVER is inserted

in the groove of the Sensor Frame, install the LOWER PAPER
GUIDE with the WASTE INK TANK COVER opened.
 When installing the LOWER PAPER GUIDE, take care not to
damage the L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR or R WASTE
INK COVER SENSOR.
Groove of the
Sensor Frame
A A
A
L WASTE INK COVER R WASTE INK COVER WASTE INK TANK COVER
SENSOR SENSOR
Figure 3-14. Removing the LOWER PAPER GUIDE

3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B

1. Remove the two screws, and remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B.
A A
A A
LOWER PAPER GUIDE B
Figure 3-15. Removing the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B

3.4.2.5 IH COVER 10. Open the Cartridge Cover.
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) 11. Remove the four screws that secure the IH COVER.
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p98) A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 4 pcs

4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p89)
IH COVER
6. Remove the FRONT COVER. (p90)
7. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p100)
8. Release the cable from the four clamps. A A
9. Disconnect the cable from the relay connector (No.1), and release the cable of the
CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR.
A
Clamps
A
Cartridge Cover
Clamp
Figure 3-17. Removing the IH COVER

Cable of the
CARTRIDGE
COVER
SENSOR
Relay Connector (No.1)
Figure 3-16. Releasing the Cable

C A U T IO N Do not take off the IH COVER strongly too far in the following
steps because the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR is attached to CARTRIDGE
the IH COVER. COVER SENSOR
Cable
12. Pull out the IH COVER.
When installing the IH COVER, insert the rib under the LOWER
PAPER GUIDE. IH COVER
IH COVER
Rib
LOWER PAPER GUIDE
Figure 3-18. Removing the IH COVER

13. Disengage the two hooks that secure the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR, and
remove the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR from the IH COVER.
Inside of IH COVER
Hole
CARTRIDGE
COVER SENSOR Positioning point
Hook
Positioning point
Figure 3-19. Removing the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR

3.4.2.6 WASTE INK TANK COVER

1. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B. (p92) LOWER
PAPER GUIDE
2. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE. (p91)
3. Disengage the two hooks on the WASTE INK TANK COVER from the two shafts
of the LOWER PAPER GUIDE using a tool such as a slotted-head screwdriver,
then remove the WASTE INK TANK COVER.
WASTE INK TANK
COVER
Shafts
Back side
Hooks
Figure 3-20. Removing the WASTE INK TANK COVER

3.4.2.7 PRINTER COVER

1. Disengage the three hinges of the PRINTER COVER from the bearings, and
remove the PRINTER COVER.
Bearing
Hinge
PRINTER COVER
Figure 3-21. Removing the PRINTER COVER

3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R COVER

1. Remove the two screws, and remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER.
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs UPPER SUPPORT R
COVER
Pay attention to the positioning points. (See below figure)
A
Panel Housing
Positioning points
UPPER SUPPORT R
COVER
RIGHT LOWER
COVER
Figure 3-22. Removing the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER
Positioning points
TOP COVER

3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER

B
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p89) Positioning point
5. Remove the six screws, and remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT
ROLL COVER. A
A) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs
B) Silver M3x10 P-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs RIGHT UPPER
COVER & RIGHT
C) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs ROLL COVER
Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure, Figure

3-23).
Inside C
Positioning points RIGHT LOWER

COVER B
IH COVER
Figure 3-23. Removing the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER

3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER

1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) RIGHT LOWER COVER

3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p124) B

6. Remove the three screws, and remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER.
B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
B
 Insert the two tabs of the IH COVER to the two holes on the A
RIGHT LOWER COVER.
 Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure).
IH COVER
Tabs
Figure 3-24. Removing the RIGHT LOWER COVER
RIGHT BASE COVER
Positioning points
RIGHT LOWER
COVER

3.4.2.11 RIGHT BASE COVER

RIGHT BASE COVER
7. Remove the two screws, and remove the RIGHT BASE COVER. A A
Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure).
RIGHT BASE COVER

Positioning point
Positioning point
Figure 3-25. Removing the RIGHT BASE COVER

3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER

1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) Upper side

B
6. Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p105)
LEFT LOWER COVER
7. Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p108)
8. Remove the two screws, and LEFT LOWER COVER.
B) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs
 Insert the two tabs of the FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER to

the two holes on the LEFT LOWER COVER.
 Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure).
FRONT LEFT
LOWER COVER
Tabs
LEFT BASE COVER
Figure 3-26. Removing the LEFT LOWER COVER
Positioning points
LEFT LOWER
COVER

3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER

6. Remove the ten screws, and remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER.
REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER
Inside
A
A
A
A A
A A
A
Figure 3-27. Removing the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER

3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER

1. Open the PRINTER COVER.
2. Remove the five screws, and remove the UPPER LEFT COVER.
A
PRINTER COVER
UPPER LEFT COVER

A
A
A
Figure 3-28. Removing the UPPER LEFT COVER

3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER

Positioning point
A
6. Remove the four screws, and remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL LEFT UPPER COVER
& LEFT ROLL COVER
COVER.

3-29).
A
Inside
Positioning points LEFT LOWER FRONT LEFT

COVER LOWER COVER
Figure 3-29. Removing the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER

3.4.2.16 LEFT BASE COVER

LEFT BASE COVER
7. Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p108) A A
8. Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p102)

9. Remove the two screws, and remove the LEFT BASE COVER.
LEFT BASE COVER

Positioning point Figure 3-30. Removing the LEFT BASE COVER
Positioning point

3.4.2.17 FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER

FRONT LEFT
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p98) LOWER COVER

9. Remove the four screws, and remove the FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER.
FRONT LEFT Left side Front side

LOWER COVER
A
Positioning points
A
A
Figure 3-31. Removing the FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER
Positioning points

3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER COVER

4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p89) REAR LEFT LOWER COVER

7. Loosen the screw that secures the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. A
8. Remove the three screws, and remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER.
C
B) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs B
C) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
C
Figure 3-32. Removing the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER

3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER FRAME

Front side
1. Remove the nine screws, and remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME.
A) Silver M4x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 6 pcs B B B
B) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs
Place the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME so that it will come on all
the four tabs of the R Side Roll Frame and L Side Roll Frame.
Back side
REAR ROLL COVER FRAME
A A
A A
Tabs R Side Roll L Side Roll Tabs

Frame Frame
Figure 3-33. Removing the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME

3.4.2.20 CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR

Clamps
8. Remove the IH COVER. (p93)
9. Release the cable from the four clamps.
10. Disconnect the cable from the Relay Connector (No.1), and remove the
CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR.
CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR
Clamp
Figure 3-34. Removing the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR

3.4.2.21 R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR

Right side
Clamps
6. Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p103)
Maintenance Box
7. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE. (p91) Holder
Clamp Hooks
10. Remove the IH COVER. (p93) R WASTE INK
COVER SENSOR
12. Remove the screw that secures the R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR.
A) Silver M1.7x6 Pan machine screw with S.W: 1 pcs Clamp
13. Pull out the cable from the groove of the Maintenance Box Holder.
14. Release the cable from the four clamps at front side. Acetate tape CR Spacer
Groove
15. Remove the pieces of acetate tape, and release the cable.
16. Release the cable from the two hooks of the CR Spacer. Cable
17. Release the cable from the three clamps at right side. Bottom side
18. Disconnect the Cable from the Relay Connector (No.9), and remove the R
WASTE INK COVER SENSOR.
A
Figure 3-35. Removing the R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR

3.4.2.22 L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR

1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) SUB-B BOARD

4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p89) Clamp
CN8
9. Remove the Lower Paper Guide (Left) (p91)
Maintenance Box
10. Remove the screw that secures the L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR. Holder
L WASTE INK
A) Silver M1.7x6 Pan machine screw with S.W: 1 pcs COVER SENSOR
11. Pull out the cable from the groove of the Maintenance Box Holder. Clamp
12. Release the cable from the nine clamps.

13. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN8) of the SUB-B BOARD.
Groove
Cable
Bottom side
Figure 3-36. Removing the L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR

3.4.2.23 INTERLOCK SWITCH

INTERLOCK SWITCH
Clamp
9. Remove the screw, and remove the INTERLOCK SWITCH.
Front side
10. Release the cable from the four clamps at front side.
Insert the hook of the INTERLOCK SWITCH to the hole on the

Front Support Frame.
A
Back side
Hook
Front Support Frame
Figure 3-37. Removing the INTERLOCK SWITCH

11. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN20) of the MAIN BOARD.
Right side
12. Release the cable of the INTERLOCK SWITCH from 12 clamps. Clamp
Back side
Clamps
MAIN BOARD
Cable
Cable
CN20
Figure 3-38. Releasing the Cable (MAIN BOARD)

Figure 3-40. Releasing the Cable (Right side)
Clamps
Board Box
Cable
Figure 3-39. Releasing the Cable (Top of the Board Box)

3.4.3 Electric Circuit Components

3.4.3.1 MAIN BOARD MAIN-C BOARD
B
A A
A D J U S T M E N T When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment
R E Q U IR E D
Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p227) and make sure to
perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
CN1
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) CN2

A A
CN4
Figure 3-41. Removing the MAIN-C BOARD
7. Remove the PSH BOARD. (p122)
8. Remove the MAIN-B BOARD. (p117)
9. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN1, CN2, CN4) of the MAIN-C
BOARD.
10. Remove the five screws and remove the MAIN-C BOARD together with the
mounting plate.
A) Silver M3x6 screw: 4 pcs
B) Silver M2.5x6 Bind machine screw: 1 pcs

11. Disconnect all cables and FFCs from the MAIN BOARD.
12. Remove the seven screws, and remove the MAIN BOARD.
C) Silver M3x6 screw: 6 pcs
D) Silver M2.5x6 Bind machine screw: 1 pcs
C C C
C
C
MAIN BOARD
Figure 3-42. Removing the MAIN BOARD

3.4.3.2 MAIN-B BOARD

8. Disconnect the USB Cable from the connector (CN6) of the MAIN-B BOARD.
9. Remove the four screws, and remove the MAIN-B BOARD.
MAIN-B BOARD
CN6
A A
A A
USB Cable
Figure 3-43. Removing the MAIN-B BOARD

3.4.3.3 MAIN-C BOARD

MAIN-C BOARD
R E Q U IR E D
A A
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) CN1

CN2
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p89) A A
6. Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p103) CN4
9. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN1, CN2, CN4) of the MAIN-C Figure 3-44. Removing the MAIN-C BOARD
BOARD.
10. Remove the four screws, and remove the MAIN-C BOARD.

3.4.3.4 SUB BOARD

CR Front Frame
A
Positioning point
7. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p99) CR UNIT
8. Unlock the CR UNIT. (p87) A
9. Remove the CR COVER. (p126)

10. Move the CR UNIT to the left end. Positioning point
Front Support Frame
11. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR Front Frame.
Figure 3-45. Removing the CR Front Frame
3-45).
CR Front Frame
Positioning point
Positioning point
Front Support Frame

12. Disengage the two hooks of the Upper EJ Holder, and remove the Upper EJ 13. Disconnect all cables and FFCs connected to the SUB BOARD.
Holder.
14. Remove the four screws, and remove the SUB BOARD.
B) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw: 4 pcs
Hooks
A A SUB BOARD
Upper EJ Holder
A A
Figure 3-46. Removing the Upper EJ Holder
Positioning points
Upper Support Frame

Figure 3-47. Removing the SUB BOARD
Upper EJ Holder
Positioning point

3.4.3.5 SUB-B BOARD

7. Disconnect all cables and FFCs connected to the SUB-B BOARD.
8. Remove the four screws, and remove the SUB-B BOARD.
A A SUB-B BOARD
A A
Figure 3-48. Removing the SUB-B BOARD

3.4.3.6 PSH BOARD

MAIN BOARD
R E Q U IR E D
Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p227) and make sure to MAIN-B BOARD
CN1
3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p124) CN5
7. Loosen the screw that secures the HDD Fixing Plate.
B
8. Remove the two screws that secure the HDD Fixing Plate. HDD Fixing Plate
A
B
9. Disconnect the cables from the connector (CN1, CN5) of the MAIN-B BOARD,
and remove the HDD Fixing Plate.
Figure 3-49. Removing the HDD Fixing Plate

10. Remove the two screws that secure the PS Plate, and pull the PS Plate slightly 12. Remove the six screws, and remove the PSH BOARD from the PS Plate.
toward you.
D) Silver M3x6 screw: 6 pcs
C) Silver M3x6 screw: 2 pcs
11. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN1, CN51) of the PSH BOARD, and PS Plate PSH BOARD
remove the PS Plate.
D D D
Cable
PSH BOARD
CN1
Cable
CN51 D D D
PS Plate
C C
Figure 3-51. Removing the PSH BOARD
Figure 3-50. Removing the PS Plate

3.4.3.7 PANEL BOARD

CN5
PANEL BOARD
2. Remove the two screws that secure the Panel Housing.
CN1
3. Disconnect the cable and FFC from the connectors (CN1, CN5) of the PANEL
BOARD.
Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure). Cable
Positioning points FFC
RIGHT UPPER
COVER
Panel Housing
A
Panel Housing
Positioning point
Figure 3-52. Removing the Panel Housing

4. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN3) of the PANEL BOARD.
5. Remove the six screws that secure the PANEL BOARD.
B) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw: 6 pcs
6. Disengage the two hooks of the Panel Housing, and remove the PANEL BOARD.
FFC
CN3
B B
B
PANEL BOARD
B
Hook
Hook
B B
Panel Housing
Figure 3-53. Removing the PANEL BOARD

3.4.4 Carriage Mechanism / Ink System Mechanism

3.4.4.1 CR COVER
CR COVER
5. Remove the FRONT COVER. (p90) CR UNIT
8. Unlock the CR UNIT.(p87) A A
9. Move the CR UNIT on the Platen.

10. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR COVER.
A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
Figure 3-54. Removing the CR COVER

3.4.4.2 DAMPER KIT

R E Q U IR E D
1. Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p280)

9. Unlock the CR UNIT. (p87)

11. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR Rear Frame.
When installing the CR Rear Frame, check the following.
A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs  Align the two positioning points (upper) and secure with two
screws while pulling toward you.
Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure, Figure  Make sure that two positioning points (lower) are engaged with
3-55). the holes on the Rear Tube Guide.
Positioning CR Rear Frame Positioning

point (upper) point (upper)
Positioning point
A CR Rear Frame
Positioning point
Positioning point
Positioning points must be
A engaged with the holes.
 Move the CR UNIT from the left end of the Rear Frame to the
full side and check from the side to make sure that FFC
Positioning point Protection Sheet and Rear Tube Guide are not interfering with
each other.
Full side Left edge of the Rear Frame

Rear Frame
CR UNIT
Rear Tube Guide
Figure 3-55. Removing the CR Rear Frame


Left side view
Rear Tube Guide
FFC Protection Sheet 13. Remove the six screws, and remove the CR Sub Fixing Plate.
B) Silver M3x10 Machine screw: 4 pcs
CR UNIT C) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
 Secure the Grounding wire and the plate with the same screw
shown in the below figure.
 Pay attention to the positioning points (See Figure 3-56).
Positioning points
x
B CR Sub Tube Frame

B
C
CR Sub Fixing Plate
C
Screw
together
Grounding wire
DAMPER KIT
CR UNIT
Figure 3-56. Removing the CR Sub Fixing Plate

14. Remove the FFC Clamp. Install the FFC Protection Sheet as follows. (Colored parts are used
15. Remove the FFC Protection Sheet. here to make explanation easier.)
1. Slide the FFC Protection Sheet under the four hooks on the CR
UNIT.
2. Slide the FFC Protection Sheet under the two flat clamps.
(Make sure that the grounding wire is routed under the FFC
Protection Sheet.)
FFC Clamp 3. Secure the FFC Protection Sheet with the FFC Clamp. (Take
care not to damage the FFC Clamp.)
FFC Protection Sheet Hooks

Hooks
Figure 3-57. Removing the FFC Protection Sheet
FFC Clamp
Hook
FFC Protection
Sheet
Flat clamp
Hook
Grounding wire

16. Disconnect the CR FFC from the connector (CN100) of the SUB BOARD.
When reassembling, secure the CR FFC and the grounding wire
17. Remove the two flat cramps. with the hook and clamps.
18. Release the CR FFC from the four hooks of the CR UNIT, and place the CR FFC
Hooks
over the rear of the printer temporarily.
Clamps
Flat cramp
Double faced tape

Grounding wire
CR FFC
CR FFC
Hooks
CN100
x
C A U T IO N  Do not remove the ink tube from damper kit when you do the
SUB BOARD PRINT HEAD, HEAD FFC and CR FFC exchange work.
 When the INK TUBE is removed at the following step, ink may
drip off from the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in
Figure 3-58. Releasing the CR FFC advance and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
Put CR FFC on the double-faced tape of the CR UNIT top surface.

(To prevent the CR FFC from loosening and rubbing with a metal 19. Remove the two screws, and remove the INK TUBE from the DAMPER KIT.
plate.) D) Silver M2.5x16 screw: 2 pcs

20. Remove the three screws, and remove the DAMPER KIT.
CR FFC
E) Silver M3x10 Machine screw: 3 pcs
INK TUBE
 Before installing the joint, make sure the Joint Rubbers are
attached to it.
 Before attaching the Joint Rubber, let it get wet with cleaning
DAMPER KIT
liquid.
 Secure the screws that secure the Ink Supply Tube with
D tightening torque about 0.39 ± 0.05 Nm.
D Joint Rubber
Figure 3-59. Removing the INK TUBE
Upper side
E
E
DAMPER KIT
Figure 3-60. Removing the DAMPER KIT

3.4.4.3 PRINT HEAD

R E Q U IR E D HEAD FFC
Ferrite Core
(with sheet)
C A U T IO N Be careful not to touch the nozzle surface of the PRINT HEAD.

Connector Connector
PRINT HEAD

3. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p98) Figure 3-61. Removing the HEAD FFC

11. Remove the DAMPER KIT. (p127)
12. Disconnect the HEAD FFCs from the four connectors of the PRINT HEAD.
13. Remove the Ferrite Core (with sheet).
C H E C K Recording the Head ID (p281) in advance will make installation of

P O IN T the new Printhead easier. (It is recommended to use a digital
camera.)

14. Remove the three screws, and remove the PRINT HEAD. 4. Secure the HEAD FFC with the four hooks of the CR UNIT.
A) Silver M2.6x8 Machine screw: 3 pcs
Upper side
Hooks Hooks
A A
PRINT HEAD
HEAD FFC
A 5. Route the CR FFC on the HEAD FFC, and secure the CR FFC
with the four hooks of the CR UNIT.
6. Secure the CR FFC with two clamps.
7. Secure the CR FFC with clamp.

Figure 3-62. Removing the PRINT HEAD
Clamp
Install the PRINT HEAD following procedures. (Step7)
1. Through the HEAD FFC into the ferrite core (with sheet). (see Sheet
Figure 3-61)
2. Connect the HEAD FFC to the connectors of the PRINT
HEAD. (see Figure 3-61) CR FFC
3. Secure the PRINT HEAD with three screws. (see Figure 3-62)
x Hooks Hooks
Clamps
(Step6)

3.4.4.4 HEAD FFC

1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) Hooks Hooks

HEAD FFC
Ferrite Core
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p89) (with sheet)

Connector Connector
PRINT HEAD
10. Remove the DAMPER KIT (Do not remove the INK TUBE). (p127)
Figure 3-63. Removing the HEAD FFC
12. Disconnect the HEAD FFCs from the four connectors of the PRINT HEAD.
13. Pull out the HEAD FFC from the Ferrite Core.
14. Release the HEAD FFC from the four hooks of the CR UNIT.
15. Remove the Ferrite Core (with sheet).

16. Remove the two FFC clamps. 19. Disengage the three joints from the two each holes on the Sheet Guide FFC.
17. Remove the screw that secures the Shield Plate FFC. 20. Remove the two FFC clamps.
Sheet Guide FFC FFC Clamps

Joints and holes
18. Pull out the CR FFC and HAED FFC from the two Ferrite Cores.
Screw
together
Positioning points
Shield Plate FFC Grounding wire
A
Carriage Ferrite Cores
Main Assy
CR FFC
FFC Clamps
Figure 3-65. Releasing the FFC (1)

FFC Clamps
HEAD FFC
Figure 3-64. Removing the HEAD FFC (Top of the CR UNIT)

21. Remove the three screws, and remove the Upper Reinforce Plate. 22. Remove the three screws, and remove the FFC Guide Assy.
B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs D) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs
Screwing the Upper Reinforce Plate in the order of (1) => (2) => (3)
as shown in Figure 3-66.
FFC Guide Assy D
D
Upper Reinforce Plate Rear Main Frame
C
C
2
1
Figure 3-67. Removing the FFC (Top of the Rear Main Frame)
3
B
Figure 3-66. Removing the Upper Reinforce Plate

23. Remove the FFC Sheet Guide. 24. Remove the four FFC clamps on the side of the Rear Main Frame.
CR FFC
Rear Main Frame
FFC Sheet Guide
HEAD FFC
FFC Clamps

Figure 3-68. Removing the FFC Sheet Guide

25. Remove the two FFC clamps from the top of the Board Box.
 Applying the HEAD FFC
26. Disconnect the HAED FFC from the connectors (CN101, CN102) of the MAIN To prevent noises caused by the contact between the SHEET ASSY
BOARD, and pull them from the hole of the Board Box. and the frame.
• Apply double-sided tape on the HEAD FFC as follows.
27. Pull out the HEAD FFC from the Ferrite Core on the Board Box.
(Double-sided tape: NITTO 5000NS)
• For new HEAD FFC, use the pre-applied double-sided tape
on the new FFC.
FFC Clamps • When replacing the HEAD FFC, start the procedure from
Step 3.
Ferrite Core
HEAD FFC
Gap
CN102
CN101
HEAD FFC
1. Peel off the acetate tape.
MAIN BOARD
SHEET ASSY
Figure 3-70. Removing the HEAD FFC (Around the Board Box) Acetate tape
HEAD FFC

2. Peel off the HEAD FFC from the frame. 4. Apply the HEAD FFC (outer) to the HEAD FFC (inner).
5. Apply double-sided tape (10 mm x 35 mm) on the HEAD FFC
HEAD FFC (inner) at the point shown in the figure below.
Double-sided tape
HEAD FFC (outer)
Double-sided tape
(10 mm × 35 mm)
HEAD FFC (inner)
Frame
6. Apply double-sided tape (20 mm x 40 mm) on the HEAD FFC
3. Apply double-sided tape (10 mm x 35 mm) on the HEAD FFC (inner) at the point shown in the figure below. (Do not peel off
(outer) at the point shown in the figure below. the currently applied double-sided tape because doing so may
damage the FFC.)
HEAD FFC (outer)
Double-sided tape (old) Double-sided tape (new)
(20 mm × 40 mm)
Double-
sided tape
Double-sided tape
(10 mm × 35 mm)
HEAD FFC (inner)

7. Measure the distance using a scale from the fourth clamp from
Table 3-2. Attachment point (SC-T3000 series)
the home (the third clamp for SC-T3200 series) to the fold line of
the HEAD FFC. After service parts Distance from
Remark
8. Peel off the two pieces of back paper of the double-sided tape and name/code the home side
apply it on the application point on the frame determined by HARNESS (549)/
measuring the HEAD FFC. (For the details of application points, 2142133 (Old part)
see table 3-2 to table 3-4.) HARNESS (550)/
76 ± 1mm
2142135 (Old part)
HARNESS (551)/
2148219 (Old part)  Measure the distance between
the third clamp from the home
Fold line Clamp HARNESS (549)/
to the fold line of the HEAD
2170115 (New part)
FFC.
HARNESS (550)/  Application points varies
Object 2170116 (New part) depending on the after service
distance
HARNESS (551)/ 101 ± 1mm parts code of the HEAD FFC.
2170117 (New part)
HARNESS HEAD
Attachment ASSY.,ASP (three
point
pieces of sets)/
1663525
Table 3-3. Attachment point (SC-T5000 series)

After service parts Distance from
Remark
x name/code the home side
HARNESS (549)/
2142134
Measure the distance between the
HARNESS (550)/
90 ± 1mm fourth clamp from the home to the
2142136
fold line of the HEAD FFC.
HARNESS (551)/
2148220

9. Secure the HEAD FFC to the frame with the acetate tape.
Table 3-4. Attachment point (SC-T7000 series) (Start application on the outside of the frame 5 mm away from
After service parts Distance from
the edge.)
Remark
name/code the home side
HARNESS (549)/
2142134
Measure the distance between the
HARNESS (550)/
122 ± 1mm fourth clamp from the home to the
2142136 5 mm
fold line of the HEAD FFC.
HARNESS (551)/
2148220
Acetate tape
Frame
10. Confirm the gap between the edge of the frame roll roller and
the edge of the HEAD FFC is 4 mm or more.
Frame Roll Roller
4 mm or more
HEAD FFC

 Installation check for the shield plate FFC and HEAD FFC 2. Confirm the gap between the HEAD FFC and the Shield Plate
1. Move the CR UNIT back and forth from the home side to the FFC (Shield Plate FFC B for SC-T3000 series) falls within the
full side two times. (When moving the CR UNIT, support the standard range. (The gap between the HEAD FFC and the
SHEET ASSY with your hand to prevent the assy from Shield Plate FFC (Shield Plate FFC B) must be 15 mm or less.)
touching the protrusion.)
Shield Plate FFC
(Shield Plate FFCB)
Protrusion
SHEET ASSY
Gap
(15 mm or less)
Full side Home side
CR UNIT HEAD FFC
3. Otherwise, pull the slacked parts in the directions of the arrows

to eliminate the excess gap. (If the gap is still more than 15 mm
after this adjustment, re-apply the Sheet Guide FFC Upper and
try again.)

4. Move the CR UNIT back and forth from the home side to the
full side two times once again, and confirm the SHEET ASSY
does not come in contact with the frame. (If they are in contact
with each other, re-apply the Shield Plate FFC (Shield Plate
FFC B for SC-T3000 series). When re-applying the FFC, make
sure the FFC is in parallel with the standard line.) (Figure 3-98)
SHEET ASSY
Frame
Do not come
into contact.

3.4.4.5 CR FFC
Hook
Hook
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p98) HEAD FFC
3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p124) Ferrite Core

5. Remove the FRONT COVER. (p90) Connector
Connector
7. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p99) PRINT HEAD

12. Disconnect the HEAD FFCs from the four connectors of the PRINT HEAD. Figure 3-71. Removing the HEAD FFC
13. Pull out the HEAD FFC from the Ferrite Core.
14. Release the HEAD FFC from the two hooks of the CR UNIT.

15. Remove the FFC clamps. 18. Disengage the three joints from the two each holes on the Sheet Guide FFC.
16. Remove the screw that secures the Shield Plate FFC. 19. Remove the two FFC clamps.
Sheet Guide FFC

Joints and holes
17. Pull out the CR FFC and HEAD FFC from the two Ferrite Cores.
Screw
together
Positioning points
Shield Plate FFC
Grounding wire
A
Carriage Ferrite Core
Main Assy
CR FFC
FFC Clamps
FFC Clamps
HEAD FFC
Figure 3-72. Removing the CR FFC (Top of the CR UNIT)

20. Remove the three screws, and remove the Upper Reinforce Plate. 21. Remove the three screws, and remove the FFC Guide Assy.
B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs D) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs
Screwing the Upper Reinforce Plate in the order of (1) => (2) => (3)
as shown in Figure 3-66.
FFC Guide Assy D
D
Upper Reinforce Plate
C
C Rear Main Frame
3
1
Figure 3-75. Removing the CR FFC (Top of the Rear Main Frame)
2
B

22. Remove the FFC Sheet Guide. 23. Remove the four FFC clamps on the side of the Rear Main Frame.
CR FFC Rear Main Frame
FFC Sheet Guide
HEAD FFC
FFC Clamps

24. Peel off the CR FFC.
Figure 3-76. Removing the FFC Sheet Guide
CR FFC
Double-sided tape

25. Remove the two FFC clamps from the top of the Board Box.
26. Disconnect the CR FFC from the connector (CN100) of the MAIN BOARD, and
pull it from the hole of the Board Box.
27. Pull out the CR FFC from the Ferrite Core on the Board Box.
FFC Clamps
Ferrite Cores
CN100
CR FFC
MAIN BOARD
Figure 3-79. Removing the CR FFC (Around the Board Box)

3.4.4.6 SHEET ASSY 10. Remove the three screws, and remove the Upper Reinforce Plate.
C H E C K This section explains the following related to the SHEET ASSY.
P O IN T  How to replace the old SHEET ASSY with a new one B) Silver M4x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
 How to disassemble the new SHEET ASSY
For the detail of this part, refer to the technical information “TE14- Screwing the Upper Reinforce Plate in the order of (1) => (2) => (3)
0049”. as shown in Figure 3-80.

2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p98) .

B
8. Unlock the CR UNIT. (p87) B
2
9. Remove the CR COVER. (p126) 1
3
A

11. Slide the Upper Reinforce Plate as shown below. 13. Move the CR UNIT to the full side.
14. Remove the three screws, and remove the FFC Guide (right).
Upper Reinforce Plate D) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs
FFC Guide right)
D D D
Figure 3-81. Sliding the Upper Reinforce Plate

12. Remove the three screws, and remove the FFC Guide (left).
Figure 3-83. Removing the FFC Guide (right)
15. Disengage the three hooks of the Sheet Guide FFC Lower.
Hooks
FFC Guide (left)
C C C
Sheet Guide FFC Lower
Figure 3-82. Removing the FFC Guide (left)

Figure 3-84. Releasing the Sheet Guide FFC Lower

16. Remove the FFC clamp.

Sheet Guide FFC Upper
17. Remove the screw that secures the SHEET ASSY.
E) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs
FFC Clamp E
Shield Plate FFC
Figure 3-85. Removing the SHEET ASSY (1)

18. Remove the following parts. After removing
 Sheet Guide FFC Lower: 1 pcs
 Sheet Guide FFC Upper: 1 pcs
 Shield Plate FFC: 2 pcs HEAD FFC
Figure 3-86. Removing the SHEET ASSY (2)

 Installation procedure 4. Apply the following parts.
1. Clean the application point for the sheet FFC guide support lower shown in the Table 3-5. Parts correspondence table
figure below with alcohol. Parts name in this manual Product name After Service Parts name Qty.
2. Peel off the liner of the double-sided tape on the Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower. SC-T3000 series Sheet Guide FFC Lower 24
Sheet Guide FFC Lower SC-T5000 series Sheet Guide FFC Lower 36 1
Double-sided tape SC-T7000 series Sheet Guide FFC Lower 44
Apply point SC-T3000 series --- ---
Sheet Guide FFC Upper SC-T5000 series Sheet Guide FFC Upper 36
1
SC-T7000 series Sheet Guide FFC Upper 44
SC-T3000 series Shield Plate FFC 24 1
Shield Plate FFC SC-T5000 series Shield Plate FFC 36
Sheet FFC guide support lower 2
SC-T7000 series Shield Plate FFC 44
SC-T3000 series Shield Plate FFC B 24 1
Figure 3-87. Applying the Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower (1) Shield Plate FFC B SC-T5000 series --- ---
SC-T7000 series --- ---
3. Apply the Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower.
C H E C K Apply the Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower straight on the
P O IN T application point. Sheet Guide FFC Lower
Align the
edge
Shield Plate FFC

Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower
Figure 3-89. Applying the Shield Plate Assy (1)
Figure 3-88. Applying the Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower (2)

5. Place the Sheet Guide FFC Upper (Shield Plate FFC B for SC-T3000 series) and 6. Move the CR UNIT to the full side.
the Shield Plate FFC in order under the HEAD FFC.
7. Place the Shield Plate FFC and the Sheet Guide FFC Lower in order on the HEAD
FFC.
C H E C K Set the Sheet Guide FFC Upper (Shield Plate FFC B) with the side
P O IN T with double-sided tape down.
C H E C K Install the Sheet Guide FFC Lower with the hooks down.
P O IN T
HEAD FFC
Shield Plate FFC
Check orientation
Hooks

(Shield Plate FFC B)
HEAD FFC
Shield Plate FFC

8. Route the Shield Plate FFC between the CR UNIT and the HEAD FFC, and secure 11. Confirm the protrusions on the Sheet Guide FFC Lower and on the two Shield
it with the two hooks on the CR UNIT. Plate FFC are aligned and located in the position shown in the figure below.
(Shield plate FFC B and Shield Plate FFC for SC-T3000 series)
9. Set the protrusion of the Sheet Guide FFC Lower at the point in the figure below.
Protrusions
Protrusion Sheet Guide FFC Lower
Hooks
HEAD FFC
Shield plate FFC

10. Place the other Shield Plate FFC (Shield Plate FFC B for SC-T3000 series) over
the HEAD FFC and secure it with the two hooks on the CR UNIT.
.
HEAD FFC
Hook
Shield Plate FFC

12. Apply the FFC clamp.

13. Secure the grounding wire with the screw. Hook
Second hook from

the home side
FFC clamp
Screw
Shield Plate FFC

Grounding wire Figure 3-96. Applying the Shield Plate Assy (8)
14. Secure the Sheet Guide FFC Upper together with the two Shield Plate FFC with
the four hooks on the Sheet Guide FFC Lower (Do the same for SC-T3000 series,
secure the Shield Plate FFC together with the Shield Plate FFC B with the hooks
on the Sheet Guide FFC Lower).
C H E C K Align the end of the Sheet Guide FFC Upper with the second hook
P O IN T from the home side on the Sheet Guide FFC Lower.

15. Move the CR UNIT to the full side. 17. Mark the frame at the point 80 mm away (to the full side) from the point marked in
Step 16.
16. Mark the frame at the point shown on the table below.
Table 3-6. Marking C H E C K  Mark it while keeping the same gap (6 mm) from the edge.
P O IN T  Do not use the guide lines on the frame because they are for the
Gap from
Product name Distance from the home side assembly process in the factory.
the edge
 142 ± 1mm (HEAD FFC ASP code: up to
2142133, 2142135, 2148219)
SC-T3000 series 6 mm 18. Draw a 100-mm long reference line from the point marked in Step 17 to the full
 162 ± 1mm (HEAD FFC ASP code: 2170115,
2170116, 2170117, 1663525 or later)
side in parallel to the edge (keep the same gap (6 mm) from the edge).
SC-T5000 series 265 ± 1 mm 6 mm
Reference line (100 mm)
SC-T7000 series 392 ± 1 mm 6 mm Mark (Step 17) Mark (Step 16)
Mark (Step 17)
80 mm
Distance from the home side
Start measuring here
Gap from the edge
6 mm
Marking
Figure 3-97. Applying the Shield PlateAssy (9)

19. Align the end of the Sheet Guide FFC Upper (Shield Plate FFC B for SC-T3000
series) with the point marked in Step 17.
20. Align the convex section of the Sheet Guide FFC Upper (Shield Plate FFC B for
SC-T3000 series) with the reference line.
21. Peel off the liner of the double-sided tape on the Sheet Guide FFC Upper (Shield
Plate FFC B for SC-T3000 series), and apply it.
Mark (Step 16)

Mark (Step 17) Sheet Guide FFC Upper
(Shield Plate FFC B)
Reference line (100 mm)
Convex section
Edge
Double-sided tape
22. Perform the “Applying the HEAD FFC” (p139).

23. Perform the “Installation check for the shield plate FFC and HEAD FFC” (p143).

3.4.4.7 CR SCALE
R E Q U IR E D


9. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR Rear Frame.

When installing the CR Rear Frame, check the following.
A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs  Align the two positioning points (upper) and secure with two
screws while pulling toward you.
Pay attention to the positioning points (See Figure 3-100).  Make sure that two positioning points (lower) are engaged with
the holes on the Rear Tube Guide.
Positioning CR Rear Frame Positioning

point (upper) point (upper)
Positioning point
A CR Rear Frame
Positioning point
Positioning points must be

engaged with the holes.
A
 Move the CR UNIT from the left end of the Rear Frame to the
Positioning point full side and check from the side to make sure that FFC
Positioning point
Protection Sheet and Rear Tube Guide are not interfering with
each other.
Full side Left edge of the Rear Frame

Rear Frame
CR UNIT
Rear Tube Guide
Figure 3-100. Removing the CR Rear Frame

10. Remove the five screws, and remove the Rear Tube Guide.
Left side view
Rear Tube Guide
FFC Protection Sheet A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 4 pcs
CR UNIT
Left side Right side

L Reinforce Plate B
R Reinforce Plate
x
A
Positioning point
A A
A
Positioning points
Positioning point
Rear Tube Guide
Figure 3-101. Removing the Rear Tube Guide

11. Remove the Tension spring. 14. Remove the CR SCALE from the hook of the CR Scale Holder.
12. Remove the CR SCALE from the hook of the CR Scale Holder B.
Right side
CR Scale Holder
CR SCALE
Left side
Tension spring CR Scale Holder B
CR SCALE
Hook
Hook
Figure 3-102. Removing the CR SCALE (Left side)
13. Remove the CR SCALE from the two each hooks on the two CR Scale Holder.
Figure 3-104. Removing the CR SCALE (Right)
15. Remove the CR SCALE from the CR UNIT.
CR Scale Holder
 Since the CR SCALE has a specific orientation, install it in the
Hook Hook
direction so that you can read the letters L/R correctly from the
front.
 Route the CR SCALE through the detection point on the CR
ENCODER on the rear of the CR UNIT when installing it.
CR SCALE
Figure 3-103. Removing the CR SCALE (Center)

Side view
CR SCALE
CR ENCODER
Detection point
CR UNIT
Figure 3-105. Removing the CR SCALE

3.4.4.8 CR ENCODER
R E Q U IR E D
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. CR ENCODER
Connector
1. Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p280) A A

FFC
8. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p99) Figure 3-106. Removing the CR ENCODER
12. Remove the PRINT HEAD. (p133)
14. Remove the APG UNIT. (p170)
15. Remove the CR MOTOR. (p167)
16. Remove the CR SCALE. (p159)
17. Remove the CR UNIT. (p182)
18. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR ENCODER.
19. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the CR ENCODER.

3.4.4.9 CR TIMMING BELT In the next step, the two plastic washers at the both ends of the
C A U T IO N
pulley shaft will come off. Be careful not to lose them.
R E Q U IR E D
19. Remove the Pulley, Shaft, and Belt together from the Pulley Holder.
Pulley Cover A Shaft Pulley
4. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p124) B
7. Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p105) CR TIMMING BELT
Pulley Holder Plastic washer
9. Unlock the CR UNIT. (p87) Back side Shaft Plastic washer

15. Remove the CR MOTOR. (p167) Figure 3-107. Disassembling the Pulley Holder

18. Remove the two screws, and remove the Pulley Cover.
B) Silver M3x12 Machine screw: 1 pcs

20. Remove the CR TIMING BELT from the Belt Holder on the back side of the CR
UNIT.
CR UNIT
CR TIMING BELT
Belt Holder
Figure 3-108. Removing the CR TIMING BELT

3.4.4.10 CR MOTOR Left side

Screws
Pulley Holder
R E Q U IR E D
Belt tension screw

CR TIMMING BELT
Figure 3-109. Loosening the CR TIMMING BELT tension
13. Remove the CR TIMING BELT from the pinion gear of the CR MOTOR.
14. Remove the two screws that secure the CR MOTOR.
A) Silver M4x10 Machine screw: 2 pcs
Right side
CR MOTOR
11. Loosen the two screws that secure the Pulley Holder. CR TIMMING BELT
Pinion gear
C H E C K Before loosening the tension at the next step, mark the position of
P O IN T the Pulley Holder to make the required adjustment easier. A A
12. Rotate the Belt tension screw counterclockwise to loosen the tension of the CR
TIMING BELT.
Figure 3-110. Removing the CR TIMMING BELT

15. Disconnect the cable of the CR MOTOR from the connector (CN19) of the MAIN 17. Cut the cable tie that secures the cable, and remove the CR MOTOR.
BOARD.
16. Release the cable from five clamps.
CR MOTOR
Cable tie
Clamps
Clamp
Cable
MAIN BOARD
Figure 3-112. Removing the CR MOTOR
CN19

3.4.4.11 CR HP SENSOR
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) Hook

CR HP SENSOR
8. Disengage the hooks, and remove the CR HP SENSOR.
9. Disconnect the cable from the CR HP SENSOR.
Cable
Connector
Figure 3-113. Removing the CR HP SENSOR

3.4.4.12 APG UNIT

R E Q U IR E D
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. APG UNIT
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) Rear Tube Guide

B
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p98) B
Positioning point
3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p124) R Reinforce Plate
A
C A U T IO N When removing the R Reinforce Plate in the next step, take care
A
not to remove the Upper Reinforce Plate together. A
7. Remove the five screws, and remove the R Reinforce Plate.

B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs 1
 Pay attention to the positioning point (See Figure 3-114).

 Tighten three screws A of R Reinforce Plate as follows. 2 3
1.Temporarily tighten screw (1) in Figure 3-114.
2.Tighten screws (2) and (3) in order.
3.Tighten screw (1) fully.
R Reinforce Plate
Figure 3-114. Removing the R Reinforce Plate

4. Remove the three screws that secure the APG UNIT. 5. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the APG Motor, and remove the APG
UNIT.
APG Motor APG UNIT

Connector
Cable
APG UNIT
Positioning point
C Figure 3-116. Removing the Cable
C
Positioning point
CR MOTOR HOLDER
Figure 3-115. Removing the APG UNIT

3.4.4.13 PG SENSOR
2. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) PG SENSOR
Hook
12. Remove the PRINT HEAD. (p133) Figure 3-117. Removing the PG SENSOR
13. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p100) 19. Disconnect the Cable from the PG SENSOR.

Cable
Connector PG SENSOR
18. Disengage the hooks, and remove the PG SENSOR.
Figure 3-118. Removing the Cable

3.4.4.14 PUMP CAP UNIT 14. Remove the PUMP CAP UNIT in the direction of the arrow.
A D J U S T M E N T When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Upper side

R E Q U IR E D
A
A
PUMP CAP UNIT
A
PUMP CAP UNIT
8. Unlock the CR UNIT.(p87) Relay Connector
(No.7, No.11, No.34)
C A U T IO N When removing the R Reinforce Plate in the next step, take care
not to remove the Upper Reinforce Plate together.
A
10. Remove the R Reinforce Plate. (p170)
When installing the R Reinforce Plate, make sure to tighten the

screws on the R Reinforce Plate in the specified order following the
procedure (p170).
11. Disconnect the cables from the Relay Connector (No.7, No.11, No.34).
12. Remove the three screws that secure the PUMP CAP UNIT. Waste Ink
Tube
C A U T IO N In the next step, waste ink may spill from the Waste Ink Tube if the
PUMP CAP UNIT
tube is disconnected from the PUMP CAP UNIT. Prepare a waste
cloth or the like in advance and be careful not to contaminate the
Figure 3-119. Removing the PUMP CAP UNIT
surroundings.
13. Remove the Waste Ink Tube from the PUMP CAP UNIT.

3.4.4.15 IC HOLDER
IC HOLDER
R E Q U IR E D
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. Relay Connector
(No.2, No.8, No.10)
FFC
1. Perform the Ink eject. (p292)

Figure 3-120. Disconnecting the Relay connectors and FFC
11. Disconnect the cable from the Relay Connector (No.2, No.8, No.10).
12. Remove the FFC from the back side of the IC HOLDER.

13. Remove the screw that secures the Rear Cover. 15. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the Maintenance Box Holder.
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs 16. Peel of the FFC from the frame and insert it into the edging saddle.
14. Disengage the boss of the Rear Cover, and remove the Rear Cover.
Back side
Double-sided tape
Double-sided tape
Boss
Back side
FFC
Rear Cover
Edging saddle
A
Maintenance Box Holder Connector
Figure 3-122. Releasing the FFC
Figure 3-121. Removing the Rear Cover

17. Remove the four screws that secure the IC HOLDER.

C A U T IO N When the INK TUBE is removed at the following step, ink may
B) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 4 pcs drip off from the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance
and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
18. Pull the IC holder slightly toward you.
Front side
19. Remove the two screws, and remove the INK TUBE from the IC HOLDER.
C) Silver M2.5x16 Machine screw: 2 pcs
B B
B B 20. Remove the IC HOLDER while pulling out the FFC.
IC HOLDER
INK TUBE
C
C
IC HOLDER
Figure 3-123. Removing the IC HOLDER (1)
Figure 3-124. Removing the IC HOLDER (2)

 Before installing the joint, make sure the Joint Rubber are
attached to it.
 Before attaching the Joint Rubber, let it get wet with cleaning
liquid.
tightening torque about 0.39 ± 0.05 Nm
Joint Rubber

3.4.4.16 INK TUBE

R E Q U IR E D
INK TUBE
DAMPER KIT
1. Perform the Ink eject. (p292) A
3. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) A

Figure 3-125. Removing the INK TUBE (1)
9. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p99)  Before installing the joint, make sure the Joint Rubber are
attached to it.
10. Unlock the CR UNIT. (p87)  Before attaching the Joint Rubber, let it get wet with cleaning
11. Remove the CR COVER. (p126) liquid.
12. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p100) tightening torque about 0.39 ± 0.05 Nm
14. Remove the CR Sub Fixing Plate. (p129) Joint Rubber
C A U T IO N When the INK TUBE is removed at the following step, ink may
drip off from the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance
and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
15. Remove the two screws, and remove the INK TUBE from the DAMPER KIT.

16. Disengage the two each hooks on the five (SC-T3000 series: four) Tube Holders, When mounting the Tube Holders, attach the following points:
and release the INK TUBE.  Move the INK TUBE to the position shown in Fig 3-103 before
reassembling.
Tube Holder  Work on installation with a turn from No.1 holder which is the
nearest to CR Unit to No.5 holder.
 Only No.1 holder, mounting direction is upside down of the
other holders. Projection of a holder is mounted upward only
No.1. (purpose: prevent noise during CR movement)
Hooks
Holder No.1: Projection is in the upside.
Tube Holders
INK TUBE
Holder No.2-5: Projection is in the downside.
5
4
 After attaching holders, adjust digit position of them in the
3
center of mark holes on the Tube Guide Plate.
2
1
Figure 3-126. Removing the INK TUBE (Left side)
Holder No.2-5 Holder No.1

Adjust in the center of holes Adjust in the center of holes

17. Remove the screw and release the INK TUBE by lifting the Front Tube fixing
Plate. Back side
Tube Holder
Hook
Take care not to press the INK TUBE flat with the Front Tube
fixing Plate.
Back side Front Tube fixing

Plate
INK TUBE
Tube Holders
Figure 3-128. Removing the Tube Holder
Front Tube fixing

Plate
Figure 3-127. Releasing the INK TUBE (Front side)

18. Disengage the hooks, and remove the three Tube Holders.

19. Remove the two screws, and remove the INK TUBE from the IC HOLDER.
 When installing the INK TUBE, attach it with the red line
C) Silver M2.5x16 screw: 2 pcs facing down.
 Before installing the joint, make sure the Joint Rubber are
C H E C K If you find it difficult to remove the INK TUBE, remove the four attached to it.
P O IN T screws that secure the IC HOLDER and pull the holder slightly  Before attaching the Joint Rubber, let it get wet with cleaning
toward you when working on it. (p.174) liquid.
Joint Rubber
IC HOLDER
INK TUBE
C
C
Figure 3-129. Removing the INK TUBE (3)

3.4.4.17 CR UNIT
R E Q U IR E D
Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p227) and make sure to A
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. A
1. Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p280) Belt tension screw

Pulley Holder Assy
Figure 3-130. Removing the Pulley Holder Assy
17. Remove the Belt tension screw and the two screws on the upper part of the Pulley
Holder Assy, then remove the Pulley Holder Assy.

18. Pull out the HEAD FFC from the Ferrite Core. 20. Remove the two FFC clamps from the top of the CR UNIT.
19. Release the HEAD FFC from the two hooks of the CR UNIT. 21. Remove the screw that secures the FFC Shield Plate.
Hook shown in the below figure.
Hook
Ferrite Core HEAD FFC

22. Pull out the HEAD FFC and CR FFC from the two Ferrite Cores.
Screw
together
FFC Shield Plate and Positioning points
Lower FFC Sheet Guide Grounding wire
B
Carriage Ferrite Core
Main Assy
CR FFC
Figure 3-131. Removing the HEAD FFC
FFC Clamps
HEAD FFC
Figure 3-132. Removing the HAED FFC and CR FFC (Top of the CR UNIT)

23. Remove the Wiper Cleaner. 26. Remove the CR UNIT while sliding in the direction of the arrow.
24. Remove the five screws, and remove the CR Motor Holder.
CR UNIT
25. Remove the screw, and remove the CR Scale Holder.
D) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
CR Motor Holder
C
C
D
Wiper Cleaner
C
C
CR Scale
Holder
Figure 3-134. Removing the CR UNIT
Figure 3-133. Removing the CR Scale Holder

3.4.4.18 IM SENSOR
R E Q U IR E D

A
6. Remove the FRONT COVER. (p90) Sensor Cover
CR UNIT
8. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p99) Hooks
Sensor Cover
Figure 3-135. Removing the Sensor Cover
18. Remove the screw that secures the Sensor Cover.
19. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the Sensor Cover.

20. Disconnect the FFC from the IM SENSOR, and remove the IM SENSOR.
Make sure that you can see the light emitter/receiver of the IM
SENSOR through the hole on the Sensor Cover. IM SENSOR
FFC
IM SENSOR
(Light emitter/receiver)
Hole
Connector
Sensor Cover
Figure 3-136. Removing the IM SENSOR

3.4.4.19 PW SENSOR
R E Q U IR E D

A
Sensor Cover
CR UNIT
Hooks
Sensor Cover
Figure 3-137. Removing the Sensor Cover
18. Remove the screw that secures the Sensor Cover.
19. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the Sensor Cover.

20. Disconnect the FFC from the PW SENSOR, and remove the PW SENSOR.
Make sure that you can see the light emitter/receiver of the PW
SENSOR through the hole on the Sensor Cover.
PW SENSOR
(Light emitter/receiver)
PW SENSOR
FFC
Sensor Cover Connector
Hole
Figure 3-138. Removing the PW SENSOR

3.4.5 Paper Feed Mechanism

Tension Spring
3.4.5.1 PF MOTOR
R E Q U IR E D
Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p227) and make sure to A
PF MOTOR
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) PF Motor

Mounting Plate
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p89) A

6. Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p105) Positioning point

Figure 3-139. Removing the PF Motor Mounting Plate
9. Remove the Tension Spring.
10. Remove the two screws, and remove the PF Motor Mounting Plate.
Pay attention to the positioning point (See Figure 3-139).

11. Remove the two screws, and remove the PF MOTOR from the PF Motor 13. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN1) of the SUB-B BOARD.
Mounting Plate.
14. Release the cable from the four clamps, and remove the PF MOTOR.
A) Silver M3x5 Machine screw: 2 pcs
12. Release the cable from the Edging Saddle. SUB-B BOARD
PF MOTOR
Edging Saddle
PF Motor
Mounting Plate
CN1
PF MOTOR
B
B Cable
Clamp
Cable
Figure 3-140. Removing the PF MOTOR

3.4.5.2 PF SCALE
A D J U S T M E N T When replacing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and
R E Q U IR E D PF SCALE
the Order by Repaired Part” (p227) and make sure to perform the
specified operations including required adjustment.

9. Remove the PF ENCODER. (p192)
10. Remove the PF SCALE. Figure 3-142. Removing the PF SCALE

3.4.5.3 PF ENCODER
R E Q U IR E D
PF Encoder Assy
Hooks
A
9. Remove the screw that secures the PF Encoder Assy.
Figure 3-143. Removing the PF Encoder Assy
10. Disengage the two hooks of the PF Encoder Assy, and remove the PF Encoder
Assy.
Engage the two hooks on the PF Encoder Assy under the PF Roller
Frame by sliding the assy.
PF Encoder Assy
Hooks
PF Roller Frame

11. Remove the screw, and remove the PF ENCODER.

B) Silver M2.5x6 P-tite screw: 1 pcs
12. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the PF ENCODER.
FFC
Connector
PF ENCODER
Figure 3-144. Removing the PF ENCODER

3.4.5.4 PF TIMING BELT  Pay attention to the positioning point (See Figure 3-145).
 Engage the hook on the PF Shade Cover into the hole on the
R E Q U IR E D Left Frame.
Inside
Left Frame
PF Shade Cover
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) Hook

PF Shade Cover
9. Remove the PF ENCODER. (p192)
10. Remove the Tension Spring. (p189)
11. Remove the PF TIMING BELT from the pinion gear of the PF MOTOR.
12. Remove the screw, and remove the PF Shade Cover. PF TIMING BELT

Pinion gear
A Left Frame
Positioning point
Figure 3-145. Removing the PF Shade Cover

13. Remove the PF TIMING BELT.
PF TIMING BELT
Figure 3-146. Removing the PF TIMING BELT

3.4.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER 7. Remove the Pressure Roller Shaft from the four grooves of the Release Roller
Assy.
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p98) Release Roller Assy
Pressure Roller Shaft
6. Rotate the Combination Gear 18.4, 37.6 counterclockwise to set the PRESSURE
ROLLER in the release position.
Grooves
Combination Gear 18.4, 37.6

Grooves
Figure 3-148. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER (1)

8. Pull out the Pressure Roller Shaft from the three PRESSURE ROLLERs.
PRESSURE ROLLER
Figure 3-147. Rotate the Combination Gear 18.4, 37.6

Pressure Roller Shaft
Figure 3-149. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER (2)

3.4.5.6 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR 10. Remove the two Plastic washers, and remove the Combination gear 26, 12.8 and
Combination gear 18.4, 37.6.
11. Remove the two screws, and remove the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR.
A) Silver M2.6x4 machine screw: 2 pcs
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p89) Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR
A
8. Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p102) A
9. Remove the Rear Cover Cap while sliding in the direction of the arrow.
Pay attention to the positioning point (See Figure 3-150).
Plastic washers
Combination gear 26, 12.8
Figure 3-151. Removing the Combination gear 26, 12.8 and Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
Rear Cover Cap
Positioning point
L Roll Side Frame
Figure 3-150. Removing the Rear Cover Cup

12. Remove the Motor Cover.

13. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR,
and remove the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR.
PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR

Cable
Connector
Motor Cover
Figure 3-152. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR

3.4.5.7 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR

PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR
9. Remove the PF MOTOR. (p189)
10. Rotate the Combination gear 18.4, 37.6 counterclockwise to set the PRESSURE
ROLLER in the release position (The sensor is in the transmissive state.).
C H E C K Confirm the status of the PRESSURE ROLLER with the relative

Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
P O IN T positions of the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR and Spur Gear 43
as shown below.
Figure 3-153. Rotate the Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
Spur Gear 43
PRESSURE ROLLER: Release PRESSURE ROLLER: Nip

Sensor: Transmissive Sensor: Shaded

11. Remove the Plastic washer of the Combination gear 29, 59.2, and pull the 14. Disconnect the cable from the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR.
Combination gear 29, 59.2 slightly toward you.
12. Loosen the screw that secures the Spur gear 43, and pull the Spur gear 43 slightly PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR
toward you.
Combination gear 29, 59.2 Connector

Spur gear 43
Cable
Screw Figure 3-156. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR (3)

Plastic washer
Figure 3-154. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR (1)

13. Disengage the hooks, and remove the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR.
Hook
Figure 3-155. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR (2)

3.4.5.8 ATC MOTOR 7. Remove the Motor Cover from the ATC MOTOR.

R E Q U IR E D ATC MOTOR
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. Motor Cover

6. Remove the two screws, and remove the ATC MOTOR
A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs Figure 3-158. Removing the Motor Cover
8. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the ATC MOTOR.
ATC MOTOR
A
A
Cable
ATC MOTOR
Figure 3-159. Removing the Cable
Figure 3-157. Removing the ATC MOTOR

3.4.5.9 PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER) 3. Disengage the hook, and remove the PE SENSOR.
1. Remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME. (p109) 4. Release the cable from the hook of the Holder.
2. Remove the two screws, and remove the PE Sensor Assy. 5. Disconnect the cable from the PE SENSOR.

Back side
Hook
Back side
PE Sensor Assy
A
A
Connector
PE SENSOR
Holder
Cable
Figure 3-160. Removing the PE Sensor Assy Hook
Figure 3-161. Removing the PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER)

3.4.5.10 PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER) Back side

1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) Rear Paper Guide
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p89) A
A
6. Remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME. (p109)
7. Remove the two screws, and remove the Rear Paper Guide in the direction of the
arrow.
Rear Paper Guide
Figure 3-162. Removing the Rear Paper Guide

8. Release the two hooks on the PE Sensor Assy, and remove the PE Sensor Assy to
the back side.
PE Sensor Assy
Hooks
Figure 3-163. Removing the PE Sensor Assy

9. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the Sensor Cap.
10. Disconnect the FFC from the PE SENSOR.
Back side
Hooks PE SENSOR
Connector
FFC
Sensor Cap
Figure 3-164. Removing the PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER)

3.4.5.11 PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR 7. Disengage the hook, and remove the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR.
8. Disconnect the cable from the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR.
R E Q U IR E D
Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p227) and make sure to 9. Release the cable from the hook of the Sensor Holder.
Connector Hook Hooks
Hook
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) Sensor Holder
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p98) Connector
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p89) Cable
6. Remove the two screws, and remove the Paper Thickness Sensor Assy while
sliding in the direction of the arrow.
PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR
Paper Thickness Sensor Assy

Figure 3-166. Removing the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR
Figure 3-165. Removing the Paper Thickness Sensor Assy

3.4.5.12 PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT 8. Remove the eight screws, and remove the four Rear Paper Guide in the direction
of the arrow.
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p98) A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 8 pcs
3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p124) Back side

4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p89) Rear Paper Guide
6. Remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME. (p109)
7. Remove the four Platen Adjust Cam Cover. A
A
Back side Platen Adjust Cam Cover
Rear Paper Guide
Figure 3-167. Removing the Platen Adjust Cam Cover
Figure 3-168. Removing the Rear Paper Guide

9. Rotate the Combination gear 18.4, 37.6 three turns counterclockwise to set the 10. Remove the eight screws that secure the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT using
PRESSURE ROLLER in the release state. the ratchet driver.
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 8 pcs
A A
Back side
Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
Figure 3-169. Rotate the Combination gear 18.4, 37.6

PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT
Figure 3-170. Removing the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT (1)

11. Disengage the tab of the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT using the flat-head
screwdriver or the similar tool, and slide it to the left.
12. Lift the PF Roller and loosen the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT.
13. Slide the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT in the direction of the arrow to
release the two hooks, and remove it toward you.
PF Roller
Hook
PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT
Hook
Tab
Step 13
Step 11
Figure 3-171. Removing the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT (2)

3.4.6 Cutter Mechanism

CUTTER UNIT
3.4.6.1 CUTTER UNIT
Sensor cable
R E Q U IR E D CR Spacer
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) Clamp
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p98) Hook

Acetate tape
Clamps
Relay Connector
8. Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p102) (No.27)
Figure 3-172. Releasing the Sensor Cable
10. Remove the FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER. (p107)
13. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE. (p91)
14. Disconnect the sensor cable from the Relay Connector (No.27).
15. Release the sensor cable from the four clamps.
16. Remove the pieces of acetate tape, and release the sensor cable.
17. Release the sensor cable from the hook of the CR Spacer.

18. Remove the Motor Cover. 20. Remove the two screws, and remove the CUTTER UNIT.
19. Disconnect the motor cable from the connector of the Cutter Motor. A) Silver M3x6 screw: 2 pcs

Cutter Motor
Motor Cover
Motor cable
CUTTER UNIT
Connector
Figure 3-173. Releasing the Motor Cable
Positioning
Positioning point
point Positioning point
A
A
Bottom Frame
Figure 3-174. Removing the CUTTER UNIT

3.4.7 Fans Bottom side
3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN

1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104) BOARD BOX FAN
Clamps
A
A
7. Remove the PSH BOARD. (p122) Cable

9. Remove the MAIN BOARD. (p115)
10. Release the cable from the three clamps.
11. Remove the two screws, and remove the Board Box Fan.
Figure 3-175. Removing the BOARD BOX FAN

3.4.7.2 SUCTION FAN 3. Disconnect the cable from the Relay Connector.
4. Remove the two sewers, and remove the SUCTION FAN.
R E Q U IR E D
Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p227) and make sure to B) Silver M3x40 screw: 2 pcs
Bottom side SUCTION FAN
1. Remove the screw that secures the Fan Cover.

2. Slide the Fan Covers in the direction of the arrows to engage the two each hooks,
and remove the two Fan Covers.
Bottom side
Fan Cover
Hooks Hooks
SUCTION FAN
A A
Figure 3-176. Removing the Fan Cover Relay Connector
Figure 3-177. Removing the SUCTION FAN

3.4.8 Auto Take-up Reel Hook TAKE-UP REEL COVER Auto Take-up Reel
3.4.8.1 TAKE-UP REEL COVER

1. Remove the two screws that secure the Auto Take-up Reel.
A) Silver, Phillips, Pan S-tite with S.W & P.W. M4x10: 2 pcs
2. Hold up the Auto Take-up Reel to disengage the hook, and remove the Auto Take-
up Reel.
3. Remove the four screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL COVER, and remove
the TAKE-UP REEL COVER from the Auto Take-up Reel.
B) Black, Phillips, Pan P-tite M3x10: 4 pcs
4. Disengage the six hooks that secure the Panel Cover from inside, and remove the
Panel Cover from the TAKE-UP REEL COVER.
A
B
Figure 3-178. Removing the Auto Take-up Reel
TAKE-UP REEL COVER
Panel Cover
Hook
Figure 3-179. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL COVER

3.4.8.2 TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR

1. Remove the screw that secures the TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR.
A) Black, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x10: 1 pcs
2. Remove the TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR from the Auto Take-up Reel.
3. Disconnect the connector from the TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR.
Auto Take-up Reel

TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR
Figure 3-180. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR

3.4.8.3 TAKE-UP REEL LED A

1. Remove the Flange from the Auto Take-up Reel.
2. Remove the TAKE-UP REEL COVER. (p213) TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
A
A
3. Disconnect the connector (CN1) on the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD.
Power Supply Unit
4. Remove the four screws that secure the Power Supply Unit, and remove the Power
Supply Unit.
A) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6: four pieces: 4 pcs
5. Disconnect the connector (CN23) on the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD. CN1
6. Release the harness from the cable guide, and remove the TAKE-UP REEL LED.
A
Auto Take-up Reel
Flange
Figure 3-182. Removing the Power Supply Unit
TAKE-UP REEL LED
TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
Cable guide CN23
Figure 3-181. Removing the Flange
Figure 3-183. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL LED

3.4.8.4 TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH

Flange Auto Take-up Reel
1. Remove the Flange from the Auto Take-up Reel.
2. Remove the TAKE-UP REEL COVER. (p213)
Supply Unit.
A) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6: 4 pcs
A TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD

A
Power Supply Unit
CN1


Panel Cover
6. Remove the four screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH, and remove the
TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH from the Panel Cover. TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH
B) Black, Phillips, Bind P-tite screw M2x7 (bit: No.1): 4 pcs TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
B
Install the TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH with the “ON/OFF/ON”
inscription to the right. And install the TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH
with “M” inscription to the Manual side.
CN17
B
Inscription Figure 3-186. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH

3.4.8.5 TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD

1. Remove the Flange from the Auto Take-up Reel. Flange Auto Take-up Reel
3. Remove the two screws that secure the Plate A, and remove the Plate A.
4. Remove the two screws that secure the Plate B, and remove the Plate B.
B) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6: 1 pcs
C) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M4x8: 1 pcs
Plate B
C
Plate A
B A
Figure 3-188. Removing the Plate A/B

5. Remove the six screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD, and remove the
TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD.
D) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6: 6 pcs TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD
6. Disconnect the connectors (CN1, CN2) on the TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD. CN2
CN1
Figure 3-189. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD

3.4.8.6 TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR


Supply Unit.

A
Power Supply Unit
CN1

5. Remove the two screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD Unit.

6. Disconnect the connector from the TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR, and remove the TAKE-
UP REEL MAIN BOARD Unit.
C
7. Remove the C-Ring.
8. Remove the four screws that secure the Motor Mounting Plate, and remove the Motor
Mounting Plate.
C) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M4x8: 4 pcs Motor Mounting Plate
9. Remove the two gears from the Motor Mounting Plate.

10. Remove the two screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR, and remove the
TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR.
C-Ring
D) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite with S.W & P.W. M3x6: 2 pcs
TAKE-UP REEL
Figure 3-193. Removing the Motor Mounting Plate
MAIN BOARD Unit
B
TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR
Motor Mounting Plate

Connector
Gear
Figure 3-192. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD Unit
Gear
Figure 3-194. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR

3.4.8.7 TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD


Supply Unit.

A
Power Supply Unit
CN1

5. Remove the four screws that secure the Shield Plate, and remove the three clamps and CN1 CN24* CN23 CN17 CN19* CN18
the Shield Plate. CN14*

6. Disconnect all the connectors on the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD.
CN4*
7. Remove the three screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD, and
CN11* CN2*
remove the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD.
C) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6: 3 pcs CN10* CN15*
CN3
CN8* CN26*
CN22 CN28
CN7* CN29
*: Unused connectors
Clamps Figure 3-198. Connector location

Clamp
C
TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
C
Shield Plate
Figure 3-197. Removing the Removing the Shield Plate
Figure 3-199. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD

Connector assignment:
Connector
Color Destination
assignment:
CN1 White TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD (CN2)
CN2* White Unused
CN3 - USB-A
CN4* - Unused
CN7* Black Unused
CN8* Blue Unused
CN10* Yellow Unused
CN11* Black Unused
CN14* Blue Unused
CN15* Red Unused
CN17 White TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH
CN18 Black TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR
CN19* Black Unused
CN22 Yellow TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR
CN23 Black TAKE-UP REEL LED
CN24* (FFC) Unused
CN26* Red Unused
CN28 Red TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR
CN29 White TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR

CHAPTER
4
ADJUSTMENT

4.1 Overview
This chapter describes the Service Program software utility and the adjustment
procedures required after repairing or replacing certain parts.
4.1.1 Precautions
Always observe the following cautions whenever making an adjustment on the printer.
C A U T IO N  Always refer to "4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by

Repaired Part" (p.227) and make sure to perform all the
adjustments listed in the table in the given order.
 Always read and follow the precautions given in each section
that explains each adjustment. Ignoring the precautions can
result in malfunction of the printer.
ADJUSTMENT Overview 226

4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part

The following table shows the required adjustments by repaired or replaced part and the order in which the adjustments must be performed.
Note "*1": The adjustments required for the MAIN BOARD differs depending on whether the NVRAM on the old board can be backed up or not.
"*2": When the firmware update is required, first check the version of firmware currently installed on the printer, then update the firmware if necessary.
"*3": PGPP: Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
Matte Paper: Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Service
Class Required Operations Jig Media Replaced Reattached Page
Part/Unit Program
Replacement 1 --- p. 167
2 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ √
3 CR Belt Tension Check √ Tensimeter U-507 √ √ p. 265
CR Motor Measurement & Automatic
4 √ √ --- p. 313
Adjustment
5 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ --- p. 272
CR MOTOR After 6 Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 270
replacement 7 Auto Uni-d adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 273
CR related
Auto Bi-D adjustment, acceleration and
parts/units 8 √ PGPP √ --- p. 274
deceleration correction
9 PW + T&B&S check and adjustment √ Matte paper √ --- p. 275
10 Reset the motor counter. √ √ --- p. 261
11 Housing Assembly --- √ √
CR SCALE After
3 CR Scale Check √ √ √ p. 271
replacement


Part/Unit Program
Tensimeter
3 CR Belt Tension Check √ √ √ p. 265
U-507
4 APG function check √ √ --- p. 269
5 CR Scale Check √ √ --- p. 271
CR TIMING BELT After 6 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ --- p. 272
replacement 7 Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 270
8 Auto Uni-d adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 273
9 √ PGPP √ --- p. 274
CR related Tensimeter
2 CR Belt Tension Check √ √ √ p. 265
parts/units U-507
3 APG function check √ √ √ p. 269
4 CR Scale Check √ √ √ p. 271
Head inclination auto adjustment (CR
6 √ √ --- p. 285
direction)
CR UNIT (CR Assy) After 7 Head slant auto adjustment (PF direction) √ √ --- p. 289
replacement Head inclination manual adjustment (CR
8 √ √ --- p. 286
direction)
9 Head slant manual adjustment (PF direction) √ √ --- p. 290
10 PG Adjustment √ Thickness gauge √ --- p. 277
11 Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 270
13 √ PGPP √ --- p. 274


Part/Unit Program
After
replacement
CR UNIT (CR Assy)
15 Cut Position check & adjustment √ √ --- p. 299
APG UNIT (APG Motor) After 2 APG function check √ √ --- p. 269
replacement 3 Reset the motor counter. √ √ --- p. 261
IM SENSOR After
replacement
4 Cut Position Check & Adjustment √ √ --- p. 299
PW SENSOR After
replacement
CR related
parts/units Replacement 1 --- p. 164
2 CR Belt Tension Adjustment √ Tensimeter U-507 √ √ p. 265
4 CR Scale Check √ √ --- p. 271
5 √ √ --- p. 313
Adjustment
After
replacement 6 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ --- p. 272
Head inclination auto adjustment (CR
CR ENCODER 7 √ √ --- p. 285
direction)
8 Head slant auto adjustment (PF direction) √ √ --- p. 289
Head inclination manual adjustment (CR
9 √ √ --- p. 286
direction)
10 Head slant manual adjustment (PF direction) √ √ --- p. 290
After 11 Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 270
replacement 12 PW + T&B&S check and adjustment √ Matte paper √ --- p. 275


Part/Unit Program
Before 2 Tube inner pressure reduction √ √ √ p. 280
replacement Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column
3 √ √ √
side
6 Head ID Input √ √ --- p. 281
7 Set paper. --- √ √
8 Cleaning √ √ √ p. 284
9 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ √ p. 283
10 Cleaning √ √ √ p. 284
Head Head inclination auto adjustment (CR
PRINT HEAD 11 √ √ √ p. 285
related direction)
12 Head slant auto adjustment (PF direction) √ √ √ p. 289
After
replacement Head inclination manual adjustment (CR
13 √ √ √ p. 286
direction)
14 Head slant manual adjustment (PF direction) √ √ √ p. 290
15 PG Adjustment --- Thickness gauge √ --- p. 277
17 √ PGPP √ --- p. 274
18 Reset the Print Head Counter. √ √ --- p. 261
19 CR cover assembly --- √ ---


Part/Unit Program
2 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ ---
PUMP CAP UNIT After Pump Cap Unit Measurement & Automatic
3 √ √ --- p. 313
replacement Adjustment
4 Reset the unit counter. √ √ --- p. 261
Before
2 Ink eject √ √ √ p. 292
replacement
3 Tube inner pressure reduction √ √ √ p. 280
IC HOLDER 5 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ √
6 Initial ink charge √ √ √ p. 294
After
Ink supply 7 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ √ p. 283
replacement
related 8 Cleaning √ √ √ p. 284
parts/units 9 Reset the IC Holder counter. √ √ --- p. 261
2 Reset the tube counter. √ √ --- p. 261
Before 3 Ink eject √ √ √ p. 292
replacement 4 Tube inner pressure reduction √ √ √ p. 280
Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column
5 √ √ √
INK TUBE side
After 8 Initial ink charge √ √ √ p. 294
replacement 9 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ √ p. 283
10 Cleaning √ √ √ p. 284


Part/Unit Program
Before 2 Tube inner pressure reduction √ √ √ p. 280
replacement Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column
3 √ √ √
side
Ink supply
related DAMPER KIT 6 Set paper. --- √ √
parts/units 7 Cleaning √ √ √ p. 284
After 8 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ √ p. 283
replacement 9 Cleaning √ √ √ p. 284
10 Reset the damper kit counter. √ √ --- p. 261
11 CR cover assembly --- √ √
3 PF Belt Tension check √ Tensimeter U-507 √ √ p. 295
PF TIMING BELT After
4 Media Feed Auto Adjustment √ √ --- p. 298
replacement
Paper feed 5 PW + T&B&S check and adjustment √ Matte paper √ --- p. 275
related 6 Cut Position Check & Adjustment √ √ --- p. 299
parts/units
PF MOTOR After 3 PF Belt Tension check √ Tensimeter U-507 √ √ p. 295
replacement PF Motor Measurement & Automatic
4 √ √ --- p. 313
Adjustment


Part/Unit Program
5 Media Feed Auto Adjustment √ √ --- p. 298
After 6 PW + T&B&S check and adjustment √ Matte paper √ --- p. 275
PF MOTOR
replacement 7 Cut Position Check & Adjustment √ √ --- p. 299
PF SCALE/
After 2 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ √
PF ENCODER
replacement 3 PF Scale Check √ √ √ p. 297
Paper feed 2 Turn the power on in normal mode. √ √ ---
related CUTTER UNIT (cutter motor) After 3 Cutter motor measurement √ √ --- p. 313
parts/units replacement 4 Cut Position Check & Adjustment √ √ --- p. 299
ATC MOTOR After
3 ATC Motor Measurement √ √ --- p. 313
replacement
PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR After Adjustment jig for
2 Paper thickness sensor adjustment --- √ √ p. 301
replacement paper thickness sensor
1 Print Cover Open √ √ ---
Before 2 Remove ink cartridges --- √ ---
replacement 3 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. √ √ ---
4 NVRAM Backup tool (Read) √ √ --- p. 251
Board Replacement 5 --- p. 115
Main Board (NVRAM backup
related 6 Turn the power on in Firmware update mode. --- √ ---
OK & HDD none)*1
parts/units
7 Model Selection (at service program) √ √ ---
After Update the firmware.*2 (automatically power
8 √ √ --- p. 259
replacement off)
9 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ ---
10 NVRAM Clear OK --- √ ---


Part/Unit Program
Main Board initial setting (automatically
11 √ √ --- p. 304
power off)
12 Turn the power on in Firmware update mode. --- √ ---
13 NVRAM Backup tool (Write) √ √ --- p. 251
14 Turn the power off. --- √ ---
Main Board (NVRAM backup After 15 Print Cover Close --- √ ---
OK & HDD none)*1 replacement 16 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ ---
17 Install ink cartridges --- √ ---
19 RTC & USB ID Input √ √ --- p. 305
20 Reset the Main Board exchange counter. √ √ --- p. 309
Before 1 Print Cover Open --- √ ---
replacement 2 Remove ink cartridges --- √ ---
Board
related
parts/units 4 Turn the power on in Firmware update mode. --- √ ---
Update the firmware.*2(automatically power
6 √ √ --- p. 259
off)
Main Board (NVRAM backup 8 NVRAM Clear OK --- √ ---
NG & HDD none)*1 Main Board initial setting (automatically
After 9 √ √ --- p. 304
power off)
replacement
11 Initial Ink Charge Flag off. √ √ --- p. 264
12 Rear AD Adjustment --- √ --- p. 303
13 Head ID Input (automatically power off) √ √ --- p. 281
15 RTC & USB ID Input √ √ --- p. 305


Part/Unit Program
17 MAC Address Input √ √ --- p. 306
18 Serial Number Input √ √ --- p. 307
19 Print Cover Close. --- √ ---
20 I/C Installation --- √ ---
21 FW Version Check √ √ ---
22 Suction Fan Adjustment √ √ --- p. 310
PF Motor Measurement & Automatic
24 √ √ --- p. 313
Adjustment
25 √ √ --- p. 313
Adjustment
26 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ ---
Board After Pump Cap Unit Measurement & Automatic

Main Board (NVRAM backup 27 √ √ --- p. 313
related replacement Adjustment
NG & HDD none)*1
parts/units 28 ATC Motor Measurement √ √ --- p. 313
29 Paper thickness sensor adjustment --- √ --- p. 301
30 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ --- p. 283
31 Cleaning √ √ --- p. 284
32 Media Feed Auto Adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 298
35 √ PGPP √ --- p. 274
37 CUT Motor Measurement √ √ --- p. 313


Part/Unit Program
1 Print Cover Open --- √ ---
Before 2 Remove ink cartridges --- √ ---
replacement 3 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ ---
4 NVRAM Backup tool (Read) √ √ --- p. 251
8 √ √ --- p. 259
off)
Board
related Main Board (NVRAM backup Main Board initial setting (automatically
11 √ √ --- p. 304
parts/units OK & HDD exist)*1 power off)
After 13 NVRAM Backup tool (Write) √ √ --- p. 251
replacement
14 Turn the power off. --- √ ---
15 HDD connection --- √ ---
16 Print Cover Close --- √ ---
18 Install ink cartridges --- √ ---
20 RTC & USB ID Input √ √ --- p. 305


Part/Unit Program
Before 1 Print Cover Open --- √ ---

replacement 2 Remove ink cartridges --- √ ---
4 HDD connection --- √ ---
7 √ √ --- p. 259
off)
Main Board initial setting (automatically
10 √ √ --- p. 304
power off)
Board 12 HDD S/N information writing √ √ --- p. 308
related Main Board (NVRAM backup 13 Power OFF --- √ ---
parts/units NG & HDD exist)*1
After
replacement 15 Initial Ink Charge Flag off √ √ --- p. 264
16 Rear AD Adjustment --- √ --- p. 303
17 Head ID Input (automatically power off) √ √ --- p. 281
19 RTC & USB ID Input √ √ --- p. 305
22 Serial Number Input √ √ --- p. 307
23 Print Cover Close --- √ ---
24 I/C Installation --- √ ---
25 FW Version Check √ √ ---


Part/Unit Program
28 √ √ --- p. 313
Adjustment
29 √ √ --- p. 313
Adjustment
Pump Cap Unit Measurement & Automatic
31 √ √ --- p. 313
Adjustment
33 Paper thickness sensor adjustment --- √ --- p. 301
34 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ --- p. 283
Main Board (NVRAM backup After
NG & HDD exist)*1 replacement 35 Cleaning √ √ --- p. 284
36 Media Feed Auto Adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 298
Board
related
parts/units 38 Auto Uni-d adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 273
39 √ PGPP √ --- p. 274
42 Cut Position check & adjustment √ √ --- p. 299
MAIN-C BOARD (Network 3 Update the firmware.*2 √ √ --- p. 259
Board) After
replacement


Part/Unit Program
3 √ √ --- p. 313
Adjustment
Board 4 √ √ --- p. 313
PSH BOARD (Power Supply Adjustment
related After
Board) Pump Cap Unit Measurement & Automatic
parts/units replacement 5 √ √ --- p. 313
Adjustment
7 Make the replacement date & time setting. √ √ --- p. 309
Others SUCTION FAN After
replacement

4.1.3 Adjustment Items

The following table describes the general outline of the adjustments.
Table 4-2. Adjustment Items

Service
Class Adjustment Items Overview Symptoms that the Adjustment is Needed Printer Mode Jig Media Page
Program
When the belt tension is out of standards, the
following symptoms may occur.
 Belt tension is high: The life of the belt will be
shortened. High load applied to the carriage
causes frequent wait control over the carriage
Apply a specified tension to the CR TIMING
movements to prevent overheating. If the
BELT. Measure the tension of the belt using the Normal Tensimeter
CR Belt Tension Check tension is too high, the shaft of the motor leans √ p. 265
sonic tensimeter to check if it is within standards. mode U-507
and the brush in the motor becomes worn, and
If not, adjust the tension.
will result in CR overload error.
 Belt tension is low: The belt teeth slip and the
carriage swings. The correction by the active
damper does not work and the bands (vertical
bands) occur near the side edges of paper.
Rotates the APG motor to change the PG, and see When the PG is not switched properly responding
Normal
APG function check if the PG is correctly set to its home position to the print setting, low image quality or CL √ p. 269
mode
(TYP). operation abnormality may occur.
 Checks if the IM SENSOR has any trouble/
CR related
connection failure.
 Executes IMS Position Auto Correction
Premium
(pattern detecting position correction).
If the IMS does not work properly, automatic Glossy
Ink Mark Sensor check Corrects the detecting position of the print Normal
adjustments such as Auto Bi-D Adjustment cannot √ Photo p. 270
& Auto Adjustment pattern in the sub scan direction and the main mode
be executed normally. Paper
scan direction.
(250)
 Runs the nozzle check to check if the IM
SENSOR detects the nozzle clogging
properly.
Checks the CR SCALE for any abnormality such
When the CR SCALE is not read properly, the Normal
CR Scale Check as damage or dirt and checks if the scale can be √ p. 271
carriage will not operate normally. mode
properly read by the encoder.
Calibrates the active damper.
CR Active Damper * Active damper is a function to reduce the Because the motor vibration/carriage vibration
Normal
Adjustment carriage vibration which causes vertical bands cannot be reduced, vertical bands may appear on √ p. 272
mode
(Automatic) on prints by outputting waveforms which have prints.
phases opposite to the motor vibration.


Service
Program
If this adjustment is not made, the estimation of
The CR MOTOR is designed to stop when the the motor temperature cannot be made properly
amount of heat generation (motor temperature) and may cause the following symptoms.
during motor operation reaches a predetermined
 Even though there is no problem with the
limit. The amount of heat generation is estimated
CR Motor Measurement motor temperature, the printer pauses during
based on the electrical characteristics of the Normal
& Automatic printing because it judges that the motor is in √ p. 313
motor, which vary by motor and power supply of mode
Adjustment high-temperature state.
the printer. Therefore, to get the motor control to
 Despite the motor is in a high-temperature
work properly, the electrical characteristics
values of the motor need to be measured and state, a lower motor temperature is estimated
stored in the memory on the MAIN BOARD. and the printer does not stop. This may cause
the printer to malfunction.
Premium
If this adjustment is not made, print quality Glossy
Reduces misalignment of ink droplets fired to Normal
Auto Uni-d adjustment problems such as misaligned lines, grainy image, √ Photo p. 273
paper during unidirectional printing. mode
banding may occur. Paper
(250)
 Auto Bi-d adjustment: Reduces misalignment
 Auto Bi-d adjustment: If this adjustment is not
CR related of ink droplets fired to paper during Premium
made, print quality problems such as
Auto Bi-D adjustment, bidirectional printing. Glossy
misaligned lines, grainy image, banding may Normal
acceleration and  Acceleration and deceleration correction: To √ Photo p. 274
occur. mode
deceleration correction improve print quality for bidirectional Paper
 If this adjustment is not made, print quality
printing, corrects the movement speed of the (250)
problems may occur.
CR UNIT.
 PW: Checks that the PW sensor detects the
edges of paper correctly. Feed A4 matte paper
from the paper cassette and perform the
detection operation using the Service
Archival
Program. If this adjustment is not made, the width or length
Matte
 T&B&S: Adjusts the print start position of the of paper cannot be detected correctly. As the
PW + T&B&S check Normal Paper/
top, bottom, right and left edges of paper. result, misaligned print position or insufficient √ p. 275
and adjustment mode Enhanced
Feed A4 matte paper from the paper cassette blank space may occur, or printed images may be
Matte
and print the adjustment patterns using the broken.
Paper
Service Program. Measure the adjustment
patterns then input the measurement result.
The print start position is automatically
adjusted.


Service
Program
When the PG is out of standards, the following
symptoms may occur.
 Gap is too wide: Unstable ink droplet paths or
Adjust the platen gap of the CR UNIT using the Normal Thickness
CR related PG adjustment misaligned dots occur, and it causes low --- p. 277
thickness gauge. mode gauge
printing quality such as banding, printing
misalignment, or grainy image.
 Gap is too narrow: The head rubs paper.
Reduce the pressure in the ink flow paths. Doing this Removing a part or a unit which is needed to
Tube inner pressure Normal
prevents ink leakage that can occur when removing the reduce the pressure without reducing causes ink √ p. 280
reduction mode
PRINT HEAD or other ink related parts/units. leakage.
If the new ID is not registered after replacing the
head, the head ID of the older head is used and the
Register the head rank ID to the printer using the proper drive voltage cannot be set. The following
Service Program or check the currently registered symptoms may occur.
head rank ID. Head rank ID is information
 Since the amount of ink droplets is not proper, Normal
Head ID Input needed to drive the PRINT HEAD with proper √ p. 281
the color and density abnormalities are found mode
voltages so that proper amount of ink droplets are
on prints.
fired. The ID is assigned to each head and listed
on the label on the head.  Since the amount of ink droplets turns to be
unstable, dot missing or misaligned dots occur
while printing or flushing.
When the Nozzle Check is not executed and the
nozzle is clogging, the following symptoms may
Head related Premium
occur.
Print the pattern on which the nozzle discharging Glossy
 The adjustment pattern is not printed properly Normal
Nozzle Check condition can be checked from the Service √ Photo p. 283
and it causes a trouble for the automatic and mode
Program. Paper
visual check/adjustment.
(250)
 The automatic adjustments may fail or end
with an error.
When the cleaning is not executed, the following
symptoms may occur.
 Nozzle clogging is not solved and the printing
cannot be executed properly.
Specify the power and the color from the Service Normal
Cleaning  Ink droplets are not fired and nothing is printed √ p. 284
Program and execute the head cleaning. mode
after the PRINT HEAD is replaced to a new
one. (Executing Initial ink charge may solve
this problem but it takes time and consumes
lots of ink.)


Service
Program
APG function check Refer to CR related.
Corrects inclination of the PRINT HEAD in the
CR direction. An adjustment pattern is printed Premium
If this adjustment is not made, print quality
Head inclination auto and the IM SENSOR scans the pattern. Based on Glossy
problems such as misaligned lines, grainy image, Normal
adjustment the scanned result, a number of steps to move the √ Photo p. 285
banding, or color unevenness may occur in the mode
(CR direction) cam for the adjustment is displayed. Turn the Paper
scale of PRINT HEAD surface area.
cam the number of steps to correct the head (250)
inclination.
Corrects slant of the PRINT HEAD in the PF If this adjustment is not made, the gap between the
direction. An adjustment pattern is printed and PRINT HEAD surface and paper is kept uneven Premium
Head slant auto the IM SENSOR scans the pattern. Based on the (e.g.: the gap at the front side is wider than that at Glossy
Normal
adjustment scanned result, a number of steps to move the the rear side), and causes irregularity in size and √ Photo p. 289
mode
(PF direction) lever for the adjustment is displayed. Move the position of printed dots. This may be observed as Paper
lever the number of steps to correct the head print quality problems such as grainy image, (250)
slant. banding, or color unevenness.
Head related Correct inclination of the PRINT HEAD in the Premium
If this adjustment is not made, print quality
Head inclination CR direction. Print an adjustment pattern, and Glossy
problems such as misaligned lines, grainy image, Normal
manual adjustment visually check the pattern to see if the adjustment √ Photo p. 286
banding, or color unevenness may occur in the mode
(CR direction) is needed. To correct the head inclination, turn Paper
scale of PRINT HEAD surface area.
the cam. (250)
If this adjustment is not made, the gap between the
Correct slant of the PRINT HEAD in the PF PRINT HEAD surface and paper is kept uneven Premium
Head slant manual direction. Print an adjustment pattern, and (e.g.: the gap at the front side is wider than that at Glossy
Normal
adjustment visually check the pattern to see if the adjustment the rear side), and causes irregularity in size and √ Photo p. 290
mode
(PF direction) is needed. To correct the head slant, move the position of printed dots. This may be observed as Paper
lever. print quality problems such as grainy image, (250)
banding, or color unevenness.
Auto Uni-d adjustment Refer to CR related.
Auto Bi-D adjustment,
acceleration and Refer to CR related.


Service
Program
If ink is not discharged when instructed to do so
Serviceman
Ink eject Discharge ink from the printer. before removing parts or units, ink may leak from √ p. 292
Mode
the printer and contaminate surroundings.
Clean the ink flow paths to resolve the solidified
ink in the paths and clogging of nozzles of the If the printer is left unused for a long period
 Cleaning
PRINT HEAD. Or, when leaving the printer without doing this after discharging ink, the ink
Normal cartridge
Tube inner cleaning unused for a long period, doing this in advance left in the ink flow paths may get solidified. Once √ p. 293
mode  Maintenance
can prevent ink from getting solidified. Use the the ink becomes solidified, charging new ink may
Box
Cleaning Cartridge for service and the Service become impossible or dot missing may occur.
Program.
If this is not executed after discharging ink, air
Charge ink in the ink flow paths. Execute from Serviceman
Ink supply Initial ink charge bubbles will remain in the ink tubes and may √ p. 294
the Service Program. Mode
related cause dot missing.
The pump cap motor is designed to stop when the the motor temperature cannot be made properly
Main Unit motor temperature, the printer pauses during
Measurement & printing because it judges that the motor is in √ p. 313
Automatic Adjustment high-temperature state.
When the belt tension is out of standards, the
following symptoms may occur.
 Belt tension is high: The life of the belt will be
shortened. High load applied to the PF
Apply a specified tension to the PF TIMING
MOTOR causes frequent wait controls during
Media Feed BELT. Measure the tension of the belt using the Normal Tensimeter
PF Belt Tension check paper feeding to prevent overheating. If the √ p. 295
related sonic tensimeter to check if it is within standards. mode U-507
tension is too high, the shaft of the motor leans
If not, adjust the tension.
and the brush in the motor becomes worn, and
will result in PF motor overload error.
 Belt tension is low: The belt teeth slip and
paper cannot be fed properly.


Service
Program
Check the PF SCALE for any abnormality such
When the PF SCALE is not read properly, paper
as damage or dirt and check if the scale can be Normal
PF Scale Check feeding may become impossible and an error may √ p. 297
properly read by the encoder using the Service mode
occur.
Program.
Premium
Glossy
Media Feed Auto Adjust the paper feeding amount which varies by If paper feeding accuracy lowers, print quality Normal
√ Photo p. 298
Adjustment printer. The adjustment is made automatically. problems such as banding may occur. mode
Paper
(250)
The PF MOTOR is designed to stop when the the motor temperature cannot be made properly
PF Motor Measurement motor temperature, the printer pauses during
& Automatic printing because it judges that the motor is in √ p. 313
Adjustment high-temperature state.
Media Feed stored in the memory on the MAIN BOARD. and the printer does not stop. This may cause
related the printer to malfunction.
The ATC MOTOR is designed to stop when the the motor temperature cannot be made properly
motor temperature, the printer pauses during
ATC motor based on the electrical characteristics of the Normal
printing because it judges that the motor is in √ p. 313
measurement motor, which vary by motor and power supply of mode
high-temperature state.
work properly, the electrical characteristics  Despite the motor is in a high-temperature
Adjust the auto cut with the auto cutter to cut
paper at the proper position. Feed the roll paper
and execute printing and cutting of the
Cut Position Check & Normal
adjustment pattern using the Service Program. The cut position may be misaligned. √ p. 299
Adjustment mode
Measuring the gap between the bottom edge of
the printed paper and the pattern and inputting the
measurement result adjusts the cut position.


Service
Program
PW + T&B&S check
Refer to CR related.
and adjustment
The cutter motor is designed to stop when the the motor temperature cannot be made properly
motor temperature, the printer pauses during
CUT Motor based on the electrical characteristics of the Normal
printing because it judges that the motor is in √ p. 313
Measurement motor, which vary by motor and power supply of mode
high-temperature state.
If this adjustment is not made, the thickness of the
Media Feed paper cannot be detected correctly. As the result,
related Adjust the installation position of the sensor so the PG is not set correctly against the paper Adjustment
that the Paper thickness sensor detects the paper thickness which is actually inserted. jig for
Paper thickness sensor Serviceman
thickness correctly. Adjust the paper thickness --- paper p. 301
adjustment  When the PG becomes wider: Low print Mode
sensor using the jig for paper thickness thickness
quality such as unstable ink droplet paths or
adjustment. sensor
misaligned dots
 When the PG becomes narrower: Head rubbing
Adjust the detection sensitivity of the PE
SENSOR so that it can recognize the paper
inserted in the printer correctly. Let the sensor
If the adjustment is not executed, paper
detect the Standard Sheet (translucent media)
recognition failures may occur (e.g. paper empty Serviceman Standard
Rear AD Adjustment which is hard to recognize to check the result on --- p. 303
error occurs even with paper inserted, some media Mode Sheet
the Control Panel. (By using the media which is
are not recognized).
hard to recognize, paper can be recognized
regardless of the environmental condition or the
media)


Service
Program
NVRAM Backup/ Make a backup of data stored in the NVRAM or Serviceman
--- √ p. 251
Restore restore the data from a backup. Mode
If the adjustment is not executed, a maintenance
Check the current setting of the RTC and the Serviceman
RTC & USB ID Input error (RTC setting error) or USB recognition error √ p. 305
USB ID. Write the correct information as needed. Mode
occurs.
Read and check the MAC address of the printer. If the address is not input or a wrong address is Serviceman
MAC Address Input √ p. 306
Write a new MAC address as needed. set, a network connection trouble occurs. Mode
If the serial number is not input or a wrong
Boards Check the serial number currently set to the Serviceman
Serial Number Input number is set, it makes service management (such √ p. 307
Related printer. Write the correct information as needed. Mode
as the print/NVRAM) harder.
HDD S/N information
Write
Main Board Exchange Write the date and time when the MAIN BOARD If this is not made, correct service history is not Normal
√ p. 309
Counter is replaced to the NVRAM. recorded. mode
Power Supply Unit
Write the date and time when the Power Supply If this is not made, correct service history is not Normal
Replacement Date & √ p. 309
Board is replaced to the NVRAM. recorded. mode
Time setting
Normal
Suction Fan Adjustment Run an operation check of the SUCTION FAN. --- √ p. 310
mode
Reset the panel settings to their defaults using the
Panel Setting Reset & Normal
Control Panel, and reset the user job history using --- √ p. 311
Job History Reset mode
Others the Service Program.
Check if the LCD on the Control Panel functions Serviceman
LCD operation check --- --- p. 312
normally. Mode
Check if the buttons on the Control Panel Serviceman
Buttons operation check --- --- p. 312
function normally. Mode

4.1.4 List of Tools/Software/Consumables for Adjustments

The tables below show the tools required for adjusting this printer.
 Hardware Tools
Table 4-3. Hardware Tools
Jig Name Part Number Target Adjustment Remarks
 CR Belt Tension Adjustment
Sonic tensimeter U-507 1294120 ---
 PF Belt Tension Adjustment
P-THICK sensor adjustment jig 1424364
 Paper thickness sensor adjustment 0.5/0.6/0.8/1.0
Paper thickness sensor adjustment jig 1282355
Thickness Gauge ---  PG Adjustment 2.5/2.8
Standard Sheet (JETRAS JP-D300S) 1476228  Rear AD Adjustment ---
Cleaning Cartridge ---  Tube Cleaning ---
 CR & PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment
Calibrated Loupe --- ---
 Cut Position Check & Adjustment
 PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment
Ruler --- ---
 Cut Position Check & Adjustment
 Software Tools
Table 4-4. Software Tools
Software Name Part Number Explanation Remarks
Supplied
Service Program Used for almost all of the required adjustments. Use the latest program.
separately
Unless the Printer Driver is installed, the Service Program does
Printer Driver --- ---
not operate.
Firmware --- --- ---
 Consumables
Table 4-5. Consumables
Consumable Name Part Number Explanation Remarks
Used for adjustments that require paper. (For more details, see
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) --- ---
4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part).
Used for adjustments that require paper. (For more details, see
Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper --- ---
4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part).
Ink Cartridge --- --- ---
Maintenance Box --- --- ---

C A U T IO N Bring back the following brought and used items, then dispose of
them based on the local regulations in your country, please.
 Ink cartridges
 Cleaning cartridges
 Draining cartridges
Especially in case of ink cartridges in Europe, please refer to the

following web site to confirm the regulation in detail.
ECO Info: http://www.epson.eu/weee (available from July 2015)
x

4.1.5 Service Program Basic Operations

This section describes the basic operations of the Service Program.
C A U T IO N Save the Service Program on the desktop or directly under the C

drive. If the storage location is deep in the hierarchy, some
program tools may not work correctly.
 System Requirements
 OS: Windows XP, Vista, 7
 Interface: USB, Network
 Startup
1. Install the Printer Driver.
2. Double-click the "servprog.exe". A screen that asks if you want to carry out
the NVRAM Backup appears.
3. Select Yes to start the NVRAM Backup tool, or select No to display the
Service Program Menu screen.
4. Select the printer you want to adjust from Model Selection, and start the
adjustment.
Figure 4-1. Service Program

4.2 NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer 4.2.2 NVRAM Write Procedure

1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing
Parameters stored in the NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD are read/stored and written
[Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
onto the other NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD using this menu. Also, the exported
parameter information is displayed on the computer screen.
C A U T IO N When the MAIN board are exchanged (NVRAM back up OK &
HDD none / NVRAM back up OK & HDD exist), turn the printer
4.2.1 NVRAM Read Procedure ON in the F/W Update Mode.
1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing Turn the power ON while pressing [Load] + [Feed] +
[Menu] + [Back] + [OK]. [Maintenance]
2. Select the printer you want to adjust from the Model selection box. 2. Remove all the ink cartridges.
3. Click [Get Information] on the NVRAM Read field to start reading the 3. Start the Service Program and select NV-RAM BACKUP from the main menu.
parameters. 4. Select the printer you want to adjust from the Model selection box.
4. To view the NVRAM information: Click [Display Information] to display 5. Click [Open File] on the NVRAM Write field.
another screen of the NVRAM Viewer.
To store the NVRAM information: Click [Save]. The file is named as "serial 6. Select the NVRAM file to write on the printer.
number + acquisition date" automatically. 7. Click [Write File] to start writing the parameters.
8. When the writing is completed, exit the NV-RAM BACKUP tool.
9. Turn the printer OFF.
Figure 4-2. [NV-RAM BACKUP] Screen
ADJUSTMENT NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer 251

4.2.3 NVRAM Viewer Basic Operation DESCRIPTION

The following functions are provided.  Life Parts Operation History
1. Displays the Life Parts Operation History
1
2. Displays the history how the printer has been used (Utilization History)
3. Displays the Error History saved in the NVRAM
4. Displays the Basic Information of the printer (such as the serial No. or the
setting values)
PROCEDURE
1. Click [Display Information] on the NVRAM Read field of the NV-RAM

BACKUP screen. Another screen of the NVRAM Viewer will be displayed.
2. Select the tab you want to check.
3. Click [Save as CSV] to save the information shown in the selected tab as CSV
2 3 4 5 6
file.
4. Click [Print] to print the information shown in the selected tab.
5. Click [Close] to close the screen.
Figure 4-3. [Life Parts Operation History] Screen
1 Total Print Dimension Total printed area. The unit is m2.

2 Items ---
3 Current Value Displays current values for each part or unit.
4 Limit Displays the life limit of the part if it has.
Displays the percentage of Current Value (3) considering
5 Situation
the Limit (4) as 100%.
End of Life Estimation (YY/ The estimated date when the part or unit reaches the end of
6
MM/DD) its service life.

 Utilization History  Error History
1 5
2 3 4
6 7 8
1 2
Figure 4-4. [Utilization History] Screen Figure 4-5. [Error History] Screen
1 Items --- 1 Number of Normal Errors The number of occurrences of normal errors.
2 Current Value Displays the current value per item. Displays the types of the most recent six normal
2 Type
errors saved in the NVRAM.
3 Error Content Information of the error.
Displays the time stamps of the currently displayed
4 Time Stamp
errors.
5 Number of Service Calls The number of occurrences of service call errors.
Displays the types of the most recent six service call
6 Type
errors saved in the NVRAM.
7 Error Content Information of the error.
Displays the time stamps of the currently displayed
8 Time Stamp
errors.

 Basic Information INFORMATION SAVED TO CSV FILES
1 2  Life Parts Operation History
Table 4-6. Life Parts Operation History

Item Description
Total Print Dimension Total printed area. The unit is m2.
PRINT HEAD Number of Shots/Line
Operation history (the following
DAMPER KIT Buffer Counter
information is displayed for each of
INK TUBE (CR pass count) the items.)
Number of I/C Replacements  Current Value
IC HOLDER Pump Counter (Operation  Limit
Times)  Situation
 End of Life Estimation (YY/MM/
Pump cap unit life counter
DD)
Cut counter
 Utilization History
Table 4-7. Utilization History

Item Description
3 4
Print Head CL1s (Times) ---
Figure 4-6. [Basic Information] Screen
Cleanings (Counter to be Print Head CL2s (Times) ---
1 Serial Number Product serial number. reset) Print Head CL3s (Times) ---
2 Data Acquisition Date The date and time when NVRAM data is acquired. Print Head SSCLs (Times) ---
3 Items --- Print Head CL1s (Times) ---
4 Current Value The current value of the item. Cumulative CL Times (non Print Head CL2s (Times) ---
rewritable) Print Head CL3s (Times) ---
Print Head SSCLs (Times) ---

Table 4-7. Utilization History Table 4-7. Utilization History

Item Description Item Description
Consumed Ink Amount Power Saving Mode (Number
--- ---
<Epson Genuine> (per 110ml) of Times)
Consumed Ink Amount <Non Power ON Time Print Ratio Time of Power Saving Mode ---
---
Genuine> (per 110ml) Distance of CR Movements
---
Ink Cartridge Replacement (non rewritable)
---
History Paper Size (Paper Width) ---
Maintenance tank (Home) PW Detection (Graph) Print Pages in PW Detector
--- ---
exchange count (New) OFF
Maintenance tank (Home) APG Motor Replacement
exchange count --- ---
Times
(Accumulation)
Cartridges APG Motor Replacement Date
Maintenance tank (Home) ---
--- & Time
exchange history
ATC (Roll) Motor
Maintenance tank (Full) ---
--- Replacement Times (Normal)
exchange count (New)
ATC (Roll) Motor
Maintenance tank (Full) ---
Replacement Date & Time
exchange count ---
(Accumulation) CR Motor Replacement Times ---
Maintenance tank (Full) CR Motor Replacement Date
--- ---
exchange history & Time
Cutter blade exchange history --- CR Motor Counter when
---
Parts Replacement Date Previous Replacement
Cut count (non rewritable) ---
Tube Replacement Times ---
Total Power ON Time (min) ---
Tube Replacement Date &
Total Print Time --- ---
Time
Continuous Power ON Time Tube Counter when
--- ---
(Max.) Replacement
Print Time (Max.) --- PF Motor Replacement Times ---
Power ON Time Print Ratio Power ON - OFF Times --- PF Motor Replacement Date
---
Ratio of Print in Power ON - & Times
---
OFF hours (Power ON hours) PF Motor Counter when
---
Power On - OFF Interval Previous Replacement
(broken down by Power OFF --- PrintHead 1 (Full)
Time) ---
Replacement Times
Power OFF Time (Max.) ---

Table 4-7. Utilization History  Error History

Item Description Table 4-8. Error History
Cutter Unit Replacement
--- Item Description
Times
Number of Normal Errors Displays the most recent six errors and their time stamps.
Cutter Unit Replacement Date
--- Displays the most recent six service call errors and their time
& Times Number of Service Calls
stamps.
Damper Kit Replacement
--- Error History Displays the number of occurrences of each service call error.
Times
Damper Kit Replacement Date Displays the number of occurrences of normal errors and
--- Number of Errors
& Time service call errors.
Damper Kit Previous Counter  Basic Information
---
when Replacement
Ink Holder Ink Flow Pump Table 4-9. Basic Information
(Pressure pump motor) Drive --- Item Description
Counter Reset
Model Product name
Parts Replacement Date Ink Holder Ink Flow Pump
(Pressure pump motor) Drive Printer Serial No. Serial number of the printer.
---
Counter Replacement Date & Printer Firmware Version The version of the firmware installed on the printer.
Times
Initial Ink Charge Date & Time Date and time when the initial ink charge was done.
Pump Cap Unit Replacement
--- Setting Data Displays the settings made by the control panel menus.
Times
Pump Cap Unit Replacement
---
Date & Times
Suction Pump Counter when
---
Replacement
Main Board Replacement
---
Times
Power Supply Unit
---
Replacement Times

4.3 ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)

This mode executes the adjustment required for the repair individually.
PROCEDURE
1. Click [ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)] from the main menu.

2. Select the adjustment item that you want to execute and click [OK].
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to execute the adjustment.
4. Click [Back] to return to the main menu.
Figure 4-7. ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)
ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENTS (Individual) 257

4.4 ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)

This mode displays the required adjustments per replaced part and executes the
adjustments in order.
PROCEDURE
1. Click [ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)] from the main menu.

2. Select the name of the replaced part and click [OK].
3. Select the adjustment item that you want to execute and click [OK].
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to execute the adjustment.
5. Click [Back] to return to the adjustment item list per part after the adjustment.
6. Click [Back] to return to the main menu.
C H E C K The text of the executed adjustment is colored to be distinguished.

P O IN T The colored text gets back to normal by returning to the main
menu once.
Figure 4-8. ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)
ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence) 258

4.5 Installing Firmware

This section explains how to update the firmware. The firmware of this printer is
written in the Flash ROM on the MAIN BOARD. If the MAIN BOARD is replaced or
the firmware needs to be updated, follow the procedure below to write the firmware to
the Flash ROM.
Following two kinds of firmware are provided.

 Main firmware
 Network firmware
C A U T IO N When Initial ink charge is not needed when replacing the MAIN Figure 4-9. FIRMWARE UPDATE TOOL
BOARD with a new one, make sure to turn “Initial Ink Charge 7. Click [Browse] of the F/W Update list to select the firmware data to be installed.
Flag” to off (P. 264) before updating the firmware. (The printer is
rebooted automatically right after uploading the firmware. Since 8. Click [Update] to transfer the firmware data.
the parameter does not exist on the new MAIN BOARD, the initial
ink charge starts automatically.) When updating starts, a progress bar is displayed on the Control
C A U T IO N
Panel of the printer. After updating is complete, the printer restarts
PROCEDURE automatically. Make sure not to turn off the printer until updating
is complete. Otherwise, the printer may not operate normally
1. Turn both the printer and computer OFF and connect them with a USB cable. afterward.
2. Open the Front Cover. 9. When writing the firmware is completed, the printer will be turned OFF.
3. Pull out all the ink cartridges. 10. Click [Exit].
4. Turn the printer ON in the F/W update mode. Turn the power ON while pressing 11. Turn the printer on in the normal mode.
[Load] + [Feed] + [Maintenance] buttons together.
12. “NVRAM CLEAR OK” is displayed on the panel.
5. Start the Service Program and select [FIRMWARE UPDATE TOOL] from the
main menu. 13. Click [OK].
6. Click [Get Information] to check the current F/W version. 14. A cover open error will occur.
ADJUSTMENT Installing Firmware 259

4.6 Image Print

The following functions are provided.
 Prints an image file
 Transfers the PRN. file
PROCEDURE
1. Click [IMAGE PRINT] from the main menu.

2. Click [References] and specify a file to print.
3. Click [Print].
Figure 4-10. [IMAGE PRINT] Screen
C A U T IO N Make the file name of an image file or PRN. file in half size less
than 80 characters.
ADJUSTMENT Image Print 260

4.7 Counter Reset Table 4-10. Clear Counter Menu List

Class Item Clear Menu Name
Whenever the parts/units which have life counter are replaced, the corresponding life Main unit PRINT HEAD Print Head Counter
counter must be reset. This is important to replace those parts/units at the correct counter (Ink DAMPER KIT Damper Kit Counter
timing. system)
PUMP CAP UNIT Pump Cap Unit Counter
EXECUTION MODE IC HOLDER Ink Holder Counter
INK TUBE Ink tube counter
Normal mode Main unit MAIN BOARD Main Board Exchange Counter
counter Power Supply Unit Replacement Date &
PROCEDURE (Mechanism) POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Time Setting
1. Turn the printer ON. Change Flag

Initial Ink Charge Flag Initial Ink Charge Flag
Status
2. Start the Service Program and click [FLAG CHANGE & COUNTER RESET] Administrator
from the main menu. Administrator Password Administrator Password Reset
Password
3. Choose one of the counter reset menus to be reset.
4. Click [Run] to reset the counter.
5. Click [Finish].
6. Restart the printer.
7. With NVRAM Viewer, verify that the counter has been reset to "0".
C H E C K The history of the Counter Clear can be checked per counter on the
P O IN T NVRAM Viewer (P. 252).
Table 4-10. Clear Counter Menu List

Class Item Clear Menu Name
Main unit
CR MOTOR CR Motor Counter
counter (Motor)
Main unit PF MOTOR PF Motor Counter
counter (Motor) APG Motor APG motor counter reset
ATC MOTOR ATC Motor Counter Reset
Cutter motor Cutter motor counter reset
ADJUSTMENT Counter Reset 261

Figure 4-11. [FLAG CHANGE & COUNTER RESET] Screen
ADJUSTMENT Counter Reset 262

4.8 References
This function allows you to view the following information (PDF files).
 Control panel menus in the Normal mode
 Control panel menus in the Serviceman Mode
 Wiring diagrams
PROCEDURE
1. Click [References] from the main menu.

2. Select Panel Menu Map or Wiring Diagrams and click [Open].
Figure 4-12. References
ADJUSTMENT References 263

4.9 Initial Ink Charge Flag

This function allows you to set whether or not to execute the Initial Charge when the
printer is turned ON. To execute the Initial Charge, set the flag to ON.
PROCEDURE
2. Start the Service Program and click [FLAG CHANGE & COUNTER RESET]
from the main menu.
3. Select Initial Ink Charge Flag.
4. Select ON or OFF and click [Run].
Figure 4-13. [Initial Ink Charge Flag] Screen
ADJUSTMENT Initial Ink Charge Flag 264

4.10 CR Related Adjustments
4.10.1 CR Belt Tension Check

REQUIRED TOOLS
 Sonic tensimeter U-507

 Something to flip the belt
STANDARD VALUE
 SC-T7000 Series/SC-T5000 Series

23 ± 2 N
 SC-T3000 Series
13 ± 2 N
Figure 4-14. [CR Belt Tension Check] Screen
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE
1. <Driven pulley adjustment>

Remove the following part in advance.
 RIGHT UPPER COVER (P. 99)
 LEFT UPPER COVER (P. 105)
2. Turn the printer ON.
3. When any paper is loaded, remove it.
4. Start the Service Program and select CR Belt Tension Check.
5. Click [Run]. The CR UNIT moves left and right three times, and then moves to
the adjustment position.
ADJUSTMENT CR Related Adjustments 265

6. Check the CR TIMING BELT while the CR UNIT is running. 7. Loosen the screw A of the driven pulley holder.
 The belt runs in the middle of the driven pulley: 8. Adjust the Driven Pulley slant with the slant adjusting screw. After adjusting the
Finish. Perform the <belt tension measurement> (Step 9). slant, attach the screw A and return to Step 4.
 When the belt moves back and forth between both sides or runs on either side:
 The belt leans to the rear side of the driven pulley:
Go to Step 7.
Rotate the screw in a counterclockwise.
 The belt leans to the front side of the Driven Pulley:
Rotate the screw in a clockwise.
Driven pulley
Slant adjusting screw

Screw A
Upper CR TIMING
Driven BELT
pulley
Figure 4-16. Screw A and slant adjusting screw

Figure 4-15. Slant Adjustment of Driven Pulley

9. <Belt tension measurement> 11. Press [MEASURE] on the tensimeter and flip the belt with tweezers or a similar
Input the following values to the tensimeter. tool.
 SC-T7000 Series/SC-T5000 Series
C A U T IO N  Be sure to measure the tension of the belt on the upper side. If
 MASS: 1.0 g/m
you measure the tension of the belt on the lower side, the
 WIDTH: 8.0 mm/R measuring value may be inaccurate.
 SPAN: 300 mm  Flip the belt as weak as the tensimeter can measure it.
 SC-T3000 Series  Be careful not to let the microphone touch the belt when
flipping the belt.
 MASS: 1.0 g/m
 WIDTH: 5.5 mm/R 12. Measure the belt tension for three times, and check if the average is within the
 SPAN: 300 mm standards.
10. Bring the microphone of the tensimeter closer to the position shown in Figure  Within the standards: Click [Yes].
4-18.
 Out of the standards: After performing the adjustment from Step 15, click [No].
C H E C K Bring the microphone within 5 mm from the belt but do not let it And then go back to Step 10.
P O IN T touch the belt.
Figure 4-17. Adjustment message

13. Click [Finish].

14. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
Screws
Measuring microphone
Upper timing belt
Driven pulley holder

CR UNIT Center
(Measurement Driven pulley
point)
Tension adjustment
screw (black)
Figure 4-19. Tension adjustment screw
Figure 4-18. Measuring the belt tension

15. Loosen the two screws that secure the driven pulley holder.
16. Turn the adjustment screw to adjust the belt tension.
 If larger than standard value: Turn the screw counterclockwise.
 If smaller than standard value: Turn the screw clockwise.
After adjusting the tension, tighten the screws loosened in Step 15, and then back
to Step 10.
C H E C K The tension is changed about 1.5N by turning the adjusting screw

P O IN T for a quarter turn.

4.10.2 APG Function Check

EXECUTION MODE
Mark on the top
Normal mode
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following part in advance. --

3. Start the Service Program and select APG function check.
4. Click [Run].
APG cam
The APG mechanism will move.
Figure 4-21. Checking the APG cam

6. Since the APG is not switched correctly, execute the following remedy responding
to the symptom.
Symptom Remedy
The CR UNIT does not move to the APG Since the CR UNIT may not move smoothly,
switch position (home position). lubricate the CR UNIT. (P. 323)
Since the APG Motor may not operate, check the
The CR UNIT moves to the APG switch
wiring of the APG Motor. If there is no trouble
position but the APG mechanism does not
for the wiring, replace the APG Motor (APG
operate.
unit). (P. 170)
Since the APG mechanism on the CR UNIT may
The APG mechanism operates but the APG
not have been installed correctly, replace the CR
is not switched correctly.
UNIT. (P. 182)
After taking the above measure, return to Step 4 to check again.

Figure 4-20. [APG function check] Screen
7. Click [Finish].
5. Check that the mark on the top of the APG cam is "--". Run the check two times
and check the mark. 8. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
 “--” is on the top: Go to Step 7

 “--” is not on the top: Go to Step 6

4.10.3 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Auto Adjustment

PAPER USED
 Type: Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)

 Size: 16 inches or longer
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Load the paper into the printer.
3. Start the Service Program and select Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto
Adjustment. Figure 4-22. [Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto Adjustment] Screen
4. Click [Run].
The adjustment pattern will be printed.
5. The printed pattern is scanned by the IM SENSOR and the adjustment is made
automatically. If the adjustment failed, clean the IM SENSOR or replace it.
6. Click [Finish].
DS:<-1> Dm:<2> Dm’ :<-8> A/D:<203> D/A:<71>
0 5
Check1 = OK, Check2 = OK

Figure 4-23. Adjustment Pattern

4.10.4 CR Scale Check 4. Since the CR SCALE is not scanned correctly, clean the scale using ethanol. If the
scale still cannot be read properly, replace the CR ENCODER (P. 164) or the CR
EXECUTION MODE SCALE (P. 159). After replacing the part, return to Step 3 and check again.
5. Click [Finish].
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select CR Scale Check.
3. Click [Run].
The CR UNIT moves left and right five times, and then the CR ENCODER starts CR ENCODER
to read the scale. CR SCALE
 The result is OK: Go to Step 5

 The result is NG: Go to Step 4
Figure 4-25. CR Encoder and Scale Check
Figure 4-24. [CR Scale Check] Screen

4.10.5 CR Active Damper Auto Adjustment

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

3. Start the Service Program and select CR Active Damper Adjustment
(Automatic).
4. Click [Run] to execute the calibration of the CR active damper.
5. If a completion message appears, press [OK].
6. Click [Finish].
7. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment. Figure 4-26. [CR Active Damper Adjustment] Screen

4.10.6 Auto Uni-D Adjustment

PAPER USED

 Size:
 SC-T7000 Series: 44 inches
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE
Figure 4-27. [Auto Uni-d adjustment] Screen
3. Start the Service Program and select Auto Uni-d adjustment.
4. Click [Run].
5. After the pattern is printed, the printer will automatically scan the pattern and carry
out the adjustment (no manual adjustment is needed).
6. Click [Finish].

4.10.7 Auto Bi-D Adjustment, acceleration/deceleration

print correction
PAPER USED

 Size: The maximum paper width which can be set
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

Figure 4-29. [Auto Bi-D Adjustment] Screen
3. Start the Service Program and select Auto Bi-D adjustment, acceleration and
deceleration correction.
4. Select All rows adjust or 5 rows adjust and click [Run].
C H E C K  All rows adjust

P O IN T "All rows adjustment" results high accuracy adjustment, but it
takes a long time.
 5 rows adjust
Adjustment accuracy becomes slightly lower with "5 rows
adjustment" since colors used for this adjustment are limited;
Figure 4-30. Adjustment Pattern (all rows)
however, the adjustment time can be shorten.
6. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-31. Adjustment Pattern (5 rows)

4.10.8 PW + T&B&S check and adjustment  Size: A4
4.10.8.1 PW Adjustment STANDARD VALUE
 Top margin: 10 ± 0.4 mm

PAPER USED
 Bottom margin: 14 ± 0.6 mm
 Type: Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper
 Side margin: 10 ± 0.4 mm
 Size: A4
PROCEDURE
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE 3. Start the Service Program and select PW + T&B&S check and adjustment.
1. Turn the printer ON. 4. Click [Print]. The adjustment pattern will be printed.
2. Load the paper into the printer. 5. Measure the distance for the positions shown in Figure 4-32.
3. Start the Service Program and select PW + T&B&S check and adjustment.  Within the standards: Go to Step 9
4. Click [PW Adjustment]. Check the displayed message.  Out of the standards: Go to Step 4
 When the adjustment is complete normally: Go to Step 6

C A U T IO N Make sure to place the adjustment pattern on a flat place to
 Data written in NVRAM and acquired data have mismatch. Please try again.: measure the distances.
Go to Step 4
 Failed adjustment. Check printer condition.: Go to Step 5
5. Since the PW sensor may not be attached properly, attach it again properly. (P.
187) After attachment, check it again performing Step 4. If the same error still
occurs after the recheck, check if the sensor operates properly or not carrying out
Sensor check (P. 313). If any error was found by carrying out Sensor check,
replace the PW sensor.
6. Click [Finish].
4.10.8.2 T&B&S Adjustment
PAPER USED
 Type: Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper

6. Remove paper from the paper cassette, and carry out Step 5 feeding paper from the
rear by hand.
 Within the standards: Go to Step 9
 Out of the standards: Go to Step 7
7. Input the value which was measured in Step 5 and is out of the standards.
8. Click [Write] and return to Step 4.
9. Click [Finish].
Bottom margin (14 ± 0.6 mm)
Paper feed
direction
Side margin Full Side margin Home

side (10 ± 0.4 mm) side (10 ± 0.4 mm)
Top margin (10 ± 0.4mm)

4.10.9 PG Adjustment
Mark on the top
REQUIRED TOOLS
Thickness Gauge
STANDARD VALUE ++
 2.5 go
 2.8 no-go
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE Figure 4-33. APG cam position checking point

2. Turn OFF the printer.
3. Remove the following parts in advance.
4. Unlock the CR UNIT MANUALLY. (P. 88)
5. Check that the mark on the top of the APG cam is “++”.

<PG check>
6. Place the thickness gauge on the specified position as follows, and check PG at the
both left and right of the PRINT HEAD. If the result is NG, adjust PG carrying out
Step 7 and the following steps.
C A U T IO N When moving the CR UNIT, make sure to do it by pulling the CR

TIMING BELT.
When measuring the left side of the Head When measuring the right side of the Head
 SC-T7000 Series
Figure 4-36. The measurement position for SC-T3000 Series

 SC-T5000 Series

 SC-T3000 Series

<Adjustment>
PG adjustment
7. Move the CR UNIT to the left end. lever
8. Remove the CR COVER. (P. 126)
9. Remove the following two plate.
Plates
PG adjustment screw
Figure 4-37. Removing the plate

10. Loosen the PG adjustment screws that secure the PG adjustment levers.
11. Move the PG adjustment levers up and down to change the gap (PG).
 If “2.8 no-go” is NG: Lower the lever
 If “2.5 go” is NG: Raise the lever
Figure 4-38. PG Adjustment Levers and PG Adjustment Screws
12. Adjust all the measurement points to become within the standard.
13. Measure all the points again after adjustment to confirm all of them are within the
standard.
14. Attach the removed parts.

4.11 Head Related Checks and Adjustments
4.11.1 Tube Inner Pressure Reduction

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Tube inner pressure reduction.
3. Click [Run]. The pressure inside the ink flow paths will be reduced.
Figure 4-39. [Tube inner pressure reduction] Screen

4. Click [Finish].
ADJUSTMENT Head Related Checks and Adjustments 280

4.11.2 Head ID Input

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE
1. Write down the Head Rank ID (31 digits) that is printed on the ID label on the
PRINT HEAD (on a new PRINT HEAD when replaced with a new one.).
C H E C K
P O IN T
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10
Figure 4-40. [Head ID Input] Screen
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
QR code
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31
2. Assemble the printer.

4. Start the Service Program and select Head ID Input.
5. Enter the 31-digit ID into the edit boxes in the same way as indicated on the label.
(Enter the digits continuously without pressing the Space, Enter, or Tab key.)

6. Click [Write].
7. Click [Finish].
C A U T IO N After clicking [Finish], make sure to turn the printer off. Turning
the printer on again enables the head rank ID setting.
Input
ID label
Figure 4-41. Head rank ID

4.11.3 Nozzle Check

PAPER USED

 Size: 16 inches
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Nozzle Check.
3. Select Nozzle Check Pattern Print or Alignment Check Pattern Print. Figure 4-42. [Nozzle Check] Screen
4. Click [Run].
The nozzle check pattern or alignment check pattern is printed.
5. Examine the patterns for any missing segments, broken lines, or misaligned lines.
6. If any of the above symptoms is observed, run the cleaning and print the pattern
again to see if the problem is solved.
Figure 4-43. Nozzle check pattern

4.11.4 Cleaning
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K Please perform 1 time CL3 and repeatedly CL1 until all nozzles are
P O IN T discharged if PRINT HEAD is replaced.

2. Start the Service Program and select Cleaning.
3. Select the adjustment item that you want to execute and click [Run].
Cleaning is executed.
4. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-44. [Cleaning] Screen

4.11.5 Head Inclination Adjustment (CR direction)

The following two methods are provided.
 Automatic adjustment: An adjustment pattern is printed and scanned by the IM
SENSOR, and required adjustment level is displayed.
 Manual adjustment: Visually check the printed adjustment pattern, and determine
the required adjustment level.
The way to actually correct the head inclination according to the result obtained by any
of the above methods is the same.
PAPER USED

EXECUTION MODE
Figure 4-45. [Head inclination auto adjustment (CR direction)] Screen
Normal mode
4.11.5.1 Head Inclination Auto Adjustment (CR direction)

3. Start the Service Program and select Head inclination auto adjustment (CR
direction). Figure 4-46. Auto adjustment pattern
4. Click [Run].
5. The printed pattern is scanned by the IM SENSOR and the required adjustment
level (how much the adjustment knob should be turned) is displayed when the
adjustment is required.
6. Make the adjustment referring to 4.11.5.3Correcting Head Inclination (CR
direction) (Page 286).

4.11.5.2 Head Inclination Manual Adjustment (CR direction)

1. Turn the printer ON. OK
2. Load the paper into the printer. Paper feed
direction
3. Start the Service Program and select Head inclination manual adjustment (CR NG
direction).
4. Click [Run].
NG
Misalignment within one-dot's width is OK.
Figure 4-48. Judgement
4.11.5.3 Correcting Head Inclination (CR direction)

1. Press the F11 key of the keyboard to unlock the CR UNIT.
2. Move the CR UNIT to the left end of the printer.
4. Loosen the three screws (A, B, C) that secure the DAMPER KIT.
5. Loosen the three screws (D, E, F) that secure the head holder.
6. Loosen the screw (G) (Bit No. 1) that secures the adjustment knob.
Figure 4-47. [Head inclination manual adjustment (CR direction)] Screen
5. Examine the printed pattern visually. C A U T IO N Be careful not to completely remove the screw that secures the
adjustment knob.
6. Make the adjustment referring to 4.11.5.3Correcting Head Inclination (CR
direction) (Page 286).
7. Turn the adjustment knob to correct the head inclination. See Figure 4-49 for
which direction to move the knob.

C H E C K  See below, direction of rotation of the adjustment cam

P O IN T
Paper feed When the Cyan line is When the Cyan line is under
Adjustment knob direction under the Magenta line, the Magenta line, turn
turn clockwise counterclockwise
Plus direction  Since the resolution is different depending on the presence or

absence of the distinction mark, it is necessary to change the
amount of rotation of the adjustment cam. If there is distinction
mark, turn twice the adjustment cam compared to normal.
Minus direction
magnification
DAMPER KIT
Figure 4-49. Correcting the Head Inclination
8. Tighten the three screws to secure the head holder. Tighten them in the order
shown below. D - E - F
9. Tighten the screw to secure the adjustment knob. distinction
mark
10. Tighten the three screws to secure the DAMPER KIT. (there is no particular order 1. If there is no distinction mark
to tighten them.) When adjustment cam turn 5 to 6 notch, about one dot line will
11. Attach the CR COVER. be moved.
5 to 6 notch
12. Print the pattern and see if the inclination is corrected. If not, repeat the procedure
until the pattern becomes normal.
Plus direction
13. When finished, click [Finish] and turn the printer OFF.
Minus direction

C H E C K 2. If there is distinction mark

P O IN T When adjustment cam turn 10 to 12 notch, about one dot line
will be moved.
10 to 12 notches
Plus direction
Minus direction

4.11.6 Head Slant Adjustment (PF direction)

The following two methods are provided.
 Automatic adjustment: An adjustment pattern is printed and scanned by the IM
SENSOR, and required adjustment level is displayed.
 Manual adjustment: Visually check the printed adjustment pattern, and determine
the required adjustment level.
The way to actually correct the head inclination according to the result obtained by any
of the above methods is the same.
PAPER USED

 Size: The maximum paper width which can be set
EXECUTION MODE
Figure 4-50. [Head slant auto adjustment (PF direction)] Screen
Normal mode
4.11.6.1 Head Slant Auto Adjustment (PF direction)

3. Start the Service Program and select Head slant auto adjustment (PF direction).
4. Click [Run].
5. The printed pattern is scanned by the IM SENSOR and the required adjustment
level (how much the adjustment knob should be moved) is displayed.
6. Make the adjustment referring to 4.11.6.3Correcting Head Slant (PF direction)
(Page 291). Figure 4-51. Auto adjustment pattern

4.11.6.2 Head Slant Manual Adjustment (PF direction)

1. Turn the printer ON. A C

A=B
3. Start the Service Program and select Head slant manual adjustment (PF C=D OK
direction).
4. Click [Run]. B D
The adjustment pattern will be printed. A C
A=B
C=D OK
Paper feed direction It does not matter if the gap widths
(the width of A-B and that of C-D)
B D differ.
A C
A≠B
C≠D NG
B D
A C
A≠B
Figure 4-52. [Head slant manual adjustment (PF direction)] Screen C≠D NG
5. Examine the printed pattern visually.
See if the gaps between the squares are parallel. If so, no adjustment is required. If B D
not, make the adjustment referring to 4.11.6.3Correcting Head Slant (PF direction)
(Page 291).
Figure 4-53. Judgement

4.11.6.3 Correcting Head Slant (PF direction) 6. Tighten the screw to secure the adjustment knob.
1. Press the F11 key of the keyboard to unlock the CR UNIT. 7. Print the pattern and see if the slant is corrected. If not, repeat the procedure until
normal pattern is printed.
2. Move the CR UNIT to the left end of the printer.
8. When finished, click [Finish] and turn the printer OFF.
4. Loosen the screw (Bit No. 1) that secures the adjustment knob. Rear Front Rear Front
Print He ead
C A U T IO N Be careful not to completely remove the screw that secures the ad Print H
adjustment knob. Paper feed
Condition of the head
direction
5. Move the adjustment knob to correct the head slant. See Figure 4-54 for which
direction to move the knob. Printed pattern
Adjustment knob
Rear Front Rear Front
Screw
Adjustment knob
Minus direction
Print Head
Print Head
Plus direction
Figure 4-55. Adjustment
Figure 4-54. Correcting the Head Slant

4.12 Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments
4.12.1 Ink eject

EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K Time required for ejecting ink (all rows): about 15 minutes

P O IN T
Figure 4-56. [Ink eject] Screen

2. Remove all the ink cartridges.
3. Start the Service Program and select Ink eject.
4. Click [Run].
5. When finished, turn the printer OFF.
C A U T IO N Running the Ink eject function one time may not be enough to
prevent ink from leaking when removing the ink tubes. Prepare
paper or cloth to wipe off spilled ink in advance or run the Ink eject
function twice in a row.
ADJUSTMENT Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments 292

4.12.2 Cleaning (Tube Inner Cleaning)

THINGS TO PREPARE
 When cleaning all rows:

 4 maintenance boxes
 5 cleaning cartridges
 When cleaning single row (C/M or Y/Pk)
 2 maintenance boxes
 2 cleaning cartridges
 When cleaning single row (Mk)
 1 maintenance box
 1 cleaning cartridge
Figure 4-57. [Single channel cleaning] Screen
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Single channel cleaning.
3. Select All rows or Single row and click [Run].
4. Clean the tubes following the on-screen instructions.
5. Click [Finish].

4.12.3 Initial Ink Charge

EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
2. Start the Service Program and select Initial ink charge.
3. Insert the ink cartridges into all the ink holders.
4. Select All rows or Single row and click [Run].
5. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-58. [Initial ink charge] Screen

4.13 Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments
4.13.1 PF Belt Tension Check

REQUIRED TOOLS Fixing screws
 Sonic tensimeter U-507

 Any tools to flip the timing belt
STANDARD VALUE
 10 ± 3.5 N
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode PF motor mounting plate
PROCEDURE
Figure 4-59. Softening the PF TIMING BELT
1. Remove the following parts in advance.
 LEFT UPPER COVER (P. 105)
 LEFT LOWER COVER (P. 102)
2. Loosen the two screws that secure the PF motor mounting plate.
3. Move the mounting plate back and forth three times to soften the PF TIMING
BELT.
4. Tighten the two screws to secure the mounting plate.
ADJUSTMENT Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments 295


C A U T IO N  Flip the timing belt as weak as the tensimeter can measure it.
6. Start the Service Program and select PF Belt Tension check.
 Be careful not to let the microphone touch the timing belt when
7. Click [Run]. flipping the belt.
The PF roller rotates 30 revolutions.
11. Measure the belt tension three times, and check if the average is within the
standards.
 Within the standards: Go to Step 12
 Out of the standards: Go to Step 2
Measuring microphone
Figure 4-60. [PF Belt Tension check] Screen

8. Input the following information on the belt into the tensimeter.
 MASS: 1.3 g/m
 WIDTH: 6.0 mm/R
 SPAN: 78 mm
9. Bring the microphone of the tensimeter close to the belt as shown in Figure 4-59.
Figure 4-61. PF Belt Tension Check
C H E C K The distance between the microphone and the belt surface should 12. Click [Finish].
P O IN T be 5 mm or less, but do not let it touch the belt.
10. Click [MEASURE] on the tensimeter, and flip the timing belt with tweezers or a
similar tool.

4.13.2 PF Scale Check 5. After the PF SCALE has rotated 30 revolutions, the check result is displayed.
 The result is OK: Go to Step 7
EXECUTION MODE
 The result is NG: Go to Step 6
Normal mode 6. Since the PF SCALE may be dirty, clean it with ethanol. After cleaning the PF
SCALE, perform Step 4 to run the check again. If the result is still NG, replace the
PROCEDURE PF ENCODER (P. 192) or the PF SCALE (P. 191) and check again.
1. Remove the following part in advance. 7. Click [Finish].
 LEFT UPPER COVER (P. 105) 8. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
 LEFT LOWER COVER (P. 102)

Point to be
2. Turn the printer ON. checked
3. Start the Service Program and select PF Scale Check.

4. Click [Run] to rotate the PF SCALE.
Look at the PF ENCODER and the PF SCALE from straight above, and visually
check that the scale is not in contact with the encoder.
Figure 4-63. PF Scale Check
Figure 4-62. [PF Scale Check] Screen

4.13.3 Media Feed Auto Adjustment

PAPER USED

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K Required time: about 4 minutes

P O IN T
Figure 4-64. [Media Feed Auto Adjustment] Screen

3. Start the Service Program and select Media Feed Auto Adjustment.
4. Click [Run].
6. Click [Finish].

4.13.4 Cut Position Check & Adjustment 5. < Inaccurate cutting check >
Check if the average of the maximum value and the minimum value is within the
REQUIRED TOOLS standards.
 Calibrated Loupe  Within the standards: Go to Step 6

 Out of the standards: Replace the cutter (refer to User's Guide) since the
PAPER USED precision of the cutter is not appropriate. Replace the CUTTER UNIT if not
improved. And then, perform Step 3 again.
 Type: PGPP250
6. < Cut position check and adjustment >
 Size: Check if the average of the maximum value and the minimum value is within the
 SC-T7000 Series: 44 inches standards.
 SC-T5000 Series: 36 inches  Within the standards: Go to Step 9
 SC-T3000 Series: 24 inches  Out of the standards: Go to Step 7
7. Input the maximum value and the minimum value from the values measured in
STANDARD VALUE Step 6.
 Inaccurate cutting check: 15 ± 0.3 mm 8. After performing Step 3 and Step 4, go back to Step 6.
 Cut Position Check & Adjustment: 15 ± 0.3 mm 9. Click [Finish].
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Cut position check and adjustment.
3. Click [Print].
4. Measure the distances of three points, Home, Center, and Full shown in Figure
4-67.
Figure 4-66. [Cut position check and adjustment] Screen

Full Center Home
Paper feed
direction

4.13.5 Paper Thickness Sensor Adjustment 8. Insert the adjustment jig of 0.5 from the paper insertion opening and set the jig at
the position shown in Figure 4-68, then press [Paper Set].
REQUIRED TOOLS 9. Check that the control panel displays “00”. When the displayed value is other than
“00”, carry out the adjustment. → Go to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
 P-THICK sensor adjustment jig(0.2*/0.5/0.6)
10. Press [Paper Set], and release the paper presser.
 Paper thickness sensor adjustment jig(0.8)
Note "*": Use the P-THICK sensor adjustment jig (0.2) when measuring the paper thickness of 11. Set the adjustment jig of 0.6 at the position shown in Figure 4-68, then press
1.0 by stacking it with the Paper thickness sensor adjustment jig 0.8. [Paper Set].
12. Check that the control panel displays “10”. When the displayed value is other than
EXECUTION MODE “10”, carry out the adjustment. → Go to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
Serviceman Mode 13. Press [Paper Set], and release the paper presser.
14. Set the adjustment jig of 0.8 at the position shown in Figure 4-68, then press
STANDARD VALUE [Paper Set].
Table 4-11. Standard Value 15. Check that the control panel displays “10”. When the displayed value is other than
Paper presser status Jig type Panel display
Locked N/A 00 16. Press [Paper Set], and release the paper presser.
Locked 0.5 00 17. Insert the adjustment jig of 1.0 (Stack 0.2 jig on 0.8 jig) from the paper insertion
Locked 0.6 10 opening and set the jig at the position shown in Figure 4-68, then press [Paper
Locked 0.8 10 Set].
Locked 1.0 11 18. Check that the control panel displays “11”. When the displayed value is other than
Released N/A 01 “11”, carry out the adjustment. → ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
CHECKING PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following part in advance.

 TOP COVER (P. 89)
2. Attach the control panel (P. 124) with the upper rear cover removed.
4. Select Mecha Adjustment → Paper.
5. Press [Paper Set], and lock the paper presser.
6. Check that the control panel displays “00”. When the displayed value is other than
20. With the paper presser being released, check that the control panel displays “01”.
C H E C K Slide the paper thickness sensor holder forward to raise the value
When the displayed value is other than “01”, carry out the adjustment. → Go to P O IN T and backward it to decrease the value.
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
21. After checking and adjusting, check again all the condition is correct.
3. Secure the screws to fix the paper thickness sensor holder.
Paper thickness sensor holder 2 Paper thickness sensor holder 1
Adjustment jig
Align the right end with the 1st
row of the pressure roller
Align this end with

the stepped end of
the platen.
Screws
Setting direction
Figure 4-68. Setting position of the adjustment jig

Figure 4-69. Adjusting the Positions
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
When the least significant digit of the value differ from the standard value, adjust the
paper thickness sensor holder 2 (left side) position, and when the second digit from the
least significant digit of the value differ from the standard value, adjust the paper
thickness sensor holder (right side) position.
1. Loosen the screws (one each) that secure the paper thickness sensor holder.
2. Slide the paper thickness sensor holder forward and backward checking the panel
display, and hold the position of the paper thickness sensor holder at the
immediate after the position that the panel display is switched.

4.13.6 Rear AD Adjustment

C A U T IO N When the following procedure is conducted, make sure not to
remove the exterior parts to acquire correct AD values.
REQUIRED TOOLS
Standard Sheet (JETRAS JP-D300S)

7. Select Mecha Adjustment → Rear AD and press [OK] when [Enter] Start is
EXECUTION MODE displayed. Check that the triple-digit displayed on the control panel is within the
standard. When Retry AD Adjust is displayed, check that the standard sheet has
Serviceman Mode no abnormality (such as, breaks dirt, and wrinkles), and acquire the AD values
again.
STANDARD VALUE
83 to 129 C A U T IO N When the Retry AD Adjust is displayed again, the PE SENSOR is

broken. Replace the PE SENSOR with a new one and carry out the
PROCEDURE adjustment again.
8. Press [Back] several times to return to the top menu.
2. Select Mecha Adjustment → Rear AD.
10. Remove the standard sheet and turn the printer OFF.
C H E C K The following procedure must be done without the standard sheet.
P O IN T
Standard sheet
Align the right end with the 1st
3. Press [OK] while [Enter] Start is displayed. Confirm that the control panel row of the pressure roller
displays Retry AD Adjust.
4. Press [Back] several times to return to the top menu.
5. Select Rear AD again, and press [Paper Set] to release the paper presser when
Align this end with
[Enter] Start is displayed. the stepped end of
6. Set the standard sheet and press [Paper Set]. the platen.
C A U T IO N Set the standard sheet with its matte surface up. Setting direction
Figure 4-70. Setting Position of the Standard Sheet

4.14 Boards Related Checks and Adjustments
4.14.1 Main Board initial setting

EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode.

Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2. Start the Service Program and select Main Board initial setting.
3. Click [Run].
4. The main board will be initialized.
5. Click [OK].
6. Printer will automatically shut down.
Figure 4-71. [Main Board initial setting] Screen
C A U T IO N If the initialization fails, run this function again.

If still fails, replace main board to a brand-new main board.
ADJUSTMENT Boards Related Checks and Adjustments 304

4.14.2 RTC & USB ID Input

EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
2. Start the Service Program and select RTC&USB ID Input.
3. Check the Date and Time displayed, and correct them if necessary.
4. Enter the 10-digit serial number of the printer to generate a USB ID.
5. Click [Write USB ID] to write RTC to the NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD.
6. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-72. [RTC&USB ID Input] Screen
C A U T IO N If the printer is turned OFF and back ON after changing the USB
ID, the computer (Windows) detects the USB port as a new port
and automatically copies the printer driver as xxxx (copy x). If you
need to perform another adjustment using this tool, select the
"copy x" driver.

4.14.3 MAC Address Input

C A U T IO N Click [Read] once. After waiting two and half minutes until the
network firmware is restarted, follow the procedure below.
EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode (Partially in the Normal Mode)
PROCEDURE
1. Start the printer in the Normal Mode and reset the IP Address from the operation
panel on the printer.
3. Connect the printer to the computer both with a USB cable and a network cable.
4. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing MAC address label
5. Start the Service Program and select MAC Address Input.
Figure 4-74. MAC Address Label

7. Click [Read] once.
The written MAC address is displayed in about two minutes.
Figure 4-73. [MAC Address Input] Screen 8. Check that the address you entered and that displayed on the screen are the same.
6. Enter the MAC address indicated on the MAC address label attached on the rear of 9. Click [Finish].
the printer, and click [Write].

4.14.4 Serial Number Input

EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
2. Start the Service Program and select Serial Number Input.
3. Enter a 10-digit serial number of the printer, and click [Write].
The serial number is written to the NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD.
4. When you click [Read], the serial number written on the NVRAM is
automatically read and displayed on the screen.
5. Click [Finish]. Figure 4-75. [Serial Number Input] Screen

4.14.5 HDD S/N Information Writing

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select HDD S/N information writing.
3. Click [Run].
The HDD serial number is written to the NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD.
4. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-76. [HDD S/N Information Writing] Screen

4.14.6 Board Replacement Date & Time Setting

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Main Board Exchange Counter (or Power
Supply Unit Replacement Date & Time setting).
3. Click [Run]. When a confirmation message is displayed, press [OK].
4. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-77. [Main Board Exchange Counter] Screen

4.15 Other Printer Checks and Adjustments
4.15.1 Suction Fan Adjustment

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Suction Fan Adjustment.
3. Click [Run]. When the suction fan operates, check its operation sound and also
check if the fan sucks paper placed on the platen.
4. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-78. [Suction Fan Adjustment] Screen
ADJUSTMENT Other Printer Checks and Adjustments 310

4.15.2 Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset.
3. When initializing the panel setting, run [Initialize all setting] from the control
panel menu.
4. When resetting the user job history, click [Run].
5. Click [Finish].
6. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment. Figure 4-79. [Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset] Screen

4.15.3 Operation Panel Check (LCD & Buttons) 4.15.3.2 Panel Buttons Operation Check
4.15.3.1 Panel LCD Operation Check EXECUTION MODE
EXECUTION MODE Serviceman Mode
Serviceman Mode PROCEDURE
PROCEDURE 1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing
1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing 2. Select Mecha Adjustment → Panel Check.
3. Press buttons you want to check the functions, and check if the button names you
2. Select Mecha Adjustment → LCD RGB Check. pressed match the names displayed on the panel.
3. Select one of the three colors at a time and press [Menu]. The LCD is filled with
solid red, green or blue color. Check if there is no missing dots. Check the colors
in the order of red, green, and then blue.
4. To select the next color, press [Pause/Reset] or [Back]. Paper Feed
Pause
Paper Settings Maintenance
LCD RGB Check

Red
Green
Blue
UP
Menu
Right
Back
HEATER
Figure 4-80. Color LCD Display Check
Exits from the menu Down OK
Figure 4-81. Buttons and Their Names Displayed on the Panel

4.15.4 Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment

The measurement adjustment can be made for the following motors individually.
 CR MOTOR
 Pump motor (PUMP CAP UNIT)
 PF MOTOR
 ATC MOTOR
 Cutter motor
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE
1. Turn the printer ON. Figure 4-82. [Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment] Screen
2. Start the Service Program and select Motor Measurement & Automatic
Adjustment of the target motor.
3. Click [Run].
Measurement and adjustment are performed automatically.
4. When finished, click [Finish].
C A U T IO N The adjustment may fail if you touch the printer during

measurement. In such a case, perform the adjustment again. If the
re-adjustment is not complete correctly, replace the motor.

CHAPTER
5
MAINTENANCE

5.1 Overview C A U T IO N  Ensure sufficient work space for servicing.

 Locate the printer on a stable and flat surface.
This chapter provides information on how to maintain the printer in its optimum  When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for
operating condition. cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such
products containing flammable gas is prohibited.
Basically, servicing on the printer should be performed on-site. Be sure to strictly
 Be sure to spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the work space
observe the following precautions when servicing to avoid an accident or injury
before removing any ink-path-related parts or components to
causing the user trouble.
keep the space from being soiled with leaked ink.
 The power switch is installed on the secondary side of the  Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the
W A R N IN G
power circuit, so power is always supplied to the power supply elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily
circuit even when the switch is OFF unless the power cord is damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards
unplugged from the wall power outlet. Unless otherwise stated with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such
(for printing or operation checks), be sure to unplug the power as anti-static wrist straps.
cord from the wall outlet before disassembling or assembling  When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed,
the printer to prevent electric shock and damage to the circuit. take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in
 The Front Sensor provided for detecting open/close status of moving parts such as the fan unit.
the Printer Cover also acts as a safety interlock switch. Never  When the printer needs to be repacked for transportation after
disable the switch function to prevent possible injury. being used, make sure to follow the steps below after turning
 A lithium battery is mounted on the Main Board (control the power OFF.
circuit) for memory backup. Be sure to observe the following • Check that the Printhead is capped properly.
precautions when handling the Main Board. • Leave the ink cartridges installed in the printer.
• Be careful not to short the electrode of the battery. • Repack the printer using the packaging box, cushioning
• When replacing the battery, make sure to insert it in correct materials and protective equipment indicated in the
orientation. unpacking guide.
• Never heat the battery or plunge it into the flames.
• Do not put the Main Board directly on conductive materials.
 Be extremely careful not to get the ink into your eye or let it
come into contact with your skin. If it happens, wash out your
eye or skin with water immediately. If any abnormality is
found, contact a physician.
MAINTENANCE Overview 315

5.2 Storing the Printer

When storing the printer, make sure to leave the ink cartridges installed and place it on
a horizontal surface, and also inform the user on the following cautions.
 When not using the printer for a long time
 Turn on the printer at least once a week to let it clean the nozzles and prevent
clogging of the nozzles.
 Remove the media. If the media is left set for a long time, nip impression of
the Press Roller may remain on the media, or the media may ripple.
 Check that the Printhead is capped properly.
 Close all the covers.
 When storing the printer for a long time, evacuate the ink and flush the ink
passage. (See “4.12.2 Cleaning (Tube Inner Cleaning)” (p293).)
 Before using the printer again
Make sure to print a nozzle check pattern and check for clogging of the printhead.
If any clogging can be seen, carry out a head cleaning.
C H E C K After performing the head cleaning a few times, try turning off the
P O IN T printer and leaving it overnight or longer, so that the ink may
dissolve and the clogging might be improved.
MAINTENANCE Storing the Printer 316

5.3 Transportation
C A U T IO N  Do not lift or carry the printer with one person because it is
very heavy. When the printer needs to be moved, make sure to
lift or carry the SC-T3000 Series with two people or more, and
the SC-T7000/5000 Series with four people or more.
 When lifting the printer, work in a posture that does not
damage your body.
 To prevent the printhead from drying or ink leakage, keep the
ink cartridges installed.
 To keep the printer intact, do not touch any parts other than
those you have to touch.
Lift the printer by holding the positions shown below.
Figure 5-2. Transportation (SC-T3000 Series)
Figure 5-1. Transportation (SC-T7000 Series/T5000 Series)
MAINTENANCE Transportation 317

5.4 Exchange Parts

Exchange parts of this printer are as follows.
Note *1: M/C = Maintenance call
S/C = Service call
*2: See Chapter 2 “Troubleshooting” for details of maintenance call and service call.
*3: Reciprocating 400CPS operations, required passes for A1+/20,000 sheets: 720 x 1400 dpi (Plain Paper, CAD / Line Drawing, Fine, Continuity) x safety rate (x 2)
*4: Outward 400CPS/return 500CPS operation, required passes for A0+/20,000 sheets: 720 x 1400 dpi (Plain Paper, CAD / Line Drawing, Fine, Continuity) x safety rate (x 2)
*5: Outward 400CPS/return 500CPS operation, required passes for B0+/20,000 sheets: 720 x 1400 dpi (Plain Paper, CAD / Line Drawing, Fine, Continuity) x safety rate (x 2)
Table 5-1. Exchange Parts
Life
Parts Exchange Timing (call) *1*2
SC-T3000 series SC-T5000 series SC-T7000 series
 M/C: None
Print Head The number of fired ink droplets: 6,840,000,000,000
 S/C: None
 M/C (Near end of life): 00000400

Damper Kit Buffer counter: 280,000 times
 S/C: 14C0
The number of paths: approx. The number of paths: approx. The number of paths: approx.  M/C (Near end of life): 00000001
Ink Tube
2,900,000*3 4,100,000*4 5,000,000*5  S/C: 1101
 The number of ink cartridge replacements: 2,700 times  M/C (Near end of life): 00000080, 00001000
IC Holder
 Pump counter: 280,000 times  S/C: 14B0, 1430
 CR MOTOR
 Driven Pulley The number of paths: approx. The number of paths: approx. The number of paths: approx.  M/C: None
 CR UNIT 2,900,000*3 4,100,000*4 5,000,000*5  S/C: None
 CR FFC
 M/C (Near end of life): 00000020

Pump Cap Unit Life counter: 472,000
 S/C: 1412
 M/C: 00000008
RTC Battery 5 years or more
 S/C: None
x
MAINTENANCE Exchange Parts 318

5.5 Cleaning CLEANING THE PLATEN

1. Open the Printer Cover.
CLEANING THE ROLLER 2. Wipe of the dust or dirt in the direction of the arrow using a soft cloth such as a
1. Turn the printer on and load a roll paper with the specified maximum width. waste cloth. If the dirt persists, damp a soft cloth in water with a little neutral
2. Press the [Feed/Cut Media] button, then press the [Down] button. detergent and wring it out tightly, then wipe the dirt off with it, then dry the platen
with a dry soft cloth.
C H E C K The roll paper will be fed while the [Down] button is pressed. If no
P O IN T smear is attached on the roll paper, it is the end of cleaning, so stop C A U T IO N Do not touch the ink pads.
cleaning the roller.
Ink pad Platen
Figure 5-3. Cleaning the Platen
MAINTENANCE Cleaning 319

3. Using a pointed tool such as a tooth pick, push in the foreign things such as paper CLEANING THE INSIDE OF THE PLATEN/REPLACING THE INK PAD
dust stuck in the holes on the Platen.
After massive borderless printing is performed, waste ink may flow out on the platen.
In such a case, clean the inside of the platen and replace the ink pad.
Platen
Ink pad
Figure 5-5. Contaminated platen and ink pad
Figure 5-4. Cleaning the Suction Holes on the Platen 2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p98)

5. Remove the 12 screws (three each), and remove the four sub platen. 6. Remove the five platens in the direction of the arrow. (Remove the platen on the
full side first.)
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 12 pcs
Platen
Sub platen
A A A
Sub platen
Platen
Figure 5-6. Cleaning the inside of the platen (1)
Figure 5-7. Cleaning the inside of the platen (2)

7. Clean the platen base full of waste ink with waste cloths or the like. 9. Make sure to insert the legs of the ink pad into the holes on the platen base, then
install the five platens (install the one on the home side first.)
Platen base
Paten
Leg of the ink pad
Hole
Platen base
Figure 5-8. Cleaning the inside of the platen (3) Figure 5-10. Replacing the ink pad (2)
8. Remove the contaminated ink pad from the platen and replace it with a new one. 10. Install the four sub platen. (refer to Figure 5-6)
11. Install the TOP COVER. (p89)
12. Install the PANEL BOARD. (p124)
Ink pad 13. Install the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p98)
14. Install the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p104)
Platen
Figure 5-9. Replacing the ink pad (1)

5.6 Lubrication [Lubrication 1]
Part Name CR main shaft

LUBRICATION Lubricants (Part Code) G-84 (1516265)
This section describes necessary lubrication to maintain the functions and performance Amount φ 2 mm x 8 mm x 8 points
of this printer. Make sure to properly lubricate the parts/units specified in this section Lubrication Tool φ 2 mm injector
as necessary when replacing or maintaining them. Lubricate on both ends of the CR main shaft and between the
Lubrication Manner posts, then spread the lubricant entirely with a waste cloth or the
C A U T IO N  Make sure to perform the lubrication following the specified like.
lubrication points, lubricants, and amount. Otherwise, the
printer may not operate normally. Note Be careful not to apply the lubricant beyond the specified point.
 When lubricating the originally installed parts, first wipe off
the old lubricant completely. Lubrication Point
LUBRICATION POINTS LIST
Lubrication
Corresponding Part Name of Lubricant Lubrication Tool Reference
No.
Part name: G-84
1 CR main shaft p.323
Part code: 1516265
Part name: G-84
2 CR sub shaft p.324
Part code: 1516265
Part name: G-84
φ 2 mm injector
OIL PAD HOLDER Part code: 1516265
3 p.324
(RIGHT/LEFT) Part name: O-17
Part code: 1521154 CR main shaft
Part name: G-84
4 CR slider p.325
Part code: 1516265
MAINTENANCE Lubrication 323

[Lubrication 2] [Lubrication 3]
Part Name CR sub shaft Part Name Oil pad holder (Left/Right)
Lubricants (Part Code) G-84 (1516265) 1. G-81 (1574337)
Lubricants (Part Code)
Amount φ 2 mm x 4 mm x 8 points 2. O-17 (1521154)
Lubrication Tool φ 2 mm injector 1. 0.2 g to 0.25 g
Amount
Lubricate on the back of the CR sub shaft at the posts and spread the 2. 0.2 cc
Lubrication Manner
lubricant entirely with a waste cloth or the like. Lubrication Tool φ 2 mm injector
Note Be careful not to apply the lubricant beyond the specified point. Remove the oil pad holder.
Lubrication Manner 1. Apply the lubricant with a syringe.
2. Let the oil soak into the oil pad.
Note Be careful not to apply the lubricant beyond the specified point.
Cross section
CR sub shaft Oil pad holder
Post
Front Oil pad
Lubrication Point 2
Lubrication Point 1
Lubrication Point

[Lubrication 4]
Part Name CR slider

Lubricants (Part Code) G-84 (1516265)
Amount φ 2 mm x 7 mm
Lubrication Tool φ 2 mm injector
On the contact point of the CR slider with the sub shaft, lubricate by
Lubrication Manner
filling the lubricant into the groove.
Note Be careful not to apply lubricant beyond the specified point.
CR slider
Lubrication Point

CHAPTER
6
APPENDIX

6.1 Block Wiring Diagram

6.1.1 Main Body
㪠㪤㩷㪧㪮㩷㪚㪩㩷㪧㪘㪥㪜㪣㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫
㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㪜㪥㪚㪦㪛㪜㪩㪧㪞㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㩷
㪧㪥㪣㪶㪙㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪚㪥㪋㪣㪚㪛
㪊
㪋㪊㪌㪊㪈㪈
㪊㪚㪥㪉
㪚㪥㪊
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪈㪚㪥㪈㪇㪊㪚㪥㪈㪇㪉㪚㪥㪈㪇㪋㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫㩷㪟㪜㪘㪛㪧㪘㪥㪜㪣㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛㪧㪜㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩䋨㪫㪟㪠㪚㪢㪥㪜㪪㪪㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩䋩
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪇
㪪㪬㪙㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛㪚㪥㪈㪚㪥㪋
㪉㪈㪉
㪧㪜㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩䋨㪩㪦㪣㪣㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩䋩
㪚㪩㩷㪟㪧㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪊
㪚㪥㪈㪎㪊㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪫㪟㪠㪚㪢㪥㪜㪪㪪㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪚㪥㪌㪈㪚㪥㪈㪇㪉㪋㪇
㪚㪥㪉㪈
㪘㪚㪶㪠㪥㪚㪥㪈
㪈㪌㪚㪥㪋㪇㪇㪚㪥㪈㪍㪈㪍㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪫㪟㪠㪚㪢㪥㪜㪪㪪㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪧㪪㪟㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪈㪋㪇
㪚㪥㪊㪇㪇㪍㪚㪬㪫㪫㪜㪩㩷㪟㪦㪤㪜㩷㪧㪦㪪㪠㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪚㪥㪍㪚㪥㪈㪊㪉㪈
㪋
㩿㪬㪪㪙㩷㪘㪀㪚㪥㪈㪈㪍㪚㪥㪈㪇㪇㪋㪇
㪠㪆㪝㪚㪥㪈㪋㪊㪋
㪟㪛㪛㪚㪥㪌㪊㪇㪚㪥㪊㪇㪈㪧㪬㪤㪧㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪪㪘㪫㪘㸢㪬㪪㪙
㩿㪬㪪㪙㩷㪙㪀
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪄㪙㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛㪚㪥㪈㪐㪊
㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㪬㪩㪜㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪤㪘㪠㪥㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛㪚㪥㪉㪇㪊
㪟㪛㪛䋨㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅䋩
㪘㪫㪚㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩㪈㪉㪉㪚㪥㪉㪋
㪚㪥㪈㪌㪊㪚㪥㪉㪊㪚㪥㪉㪉㪊
㪘㪧㪞㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪠㪥㪢㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪍㪚㪥㪈
㪈㪍㪚㪥㪉㪇㪇
㪌㪚㪥㪏
㪬㪪㪙㩷㪠㪆㪝㪚㪥㪌
㪚㪥㪍㩷㩿㪬㪪㪙㩷㪙㪀㪚㪥㪌㪇㪇
㪬㪪㪙㩷㪠㪆㪝㪌㪈㪋
㪚㪥㪎㩷㩿㪬㪪㪙㩷㪘㪀
㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㩷㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪩㩷㪮㪘㪪㪫㪜㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪉㪌㪈㪋
㪚㪥㪋㪚㪥㪉㪚㪥㪈㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㪬㪩㪜㩷㪧㪬㪤㪧㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪚㪪㪠㪚㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪘㪚㪫㩷㪤㪦㪛㪬㪣㪜㪤㪘㪠㪥㪄㪚㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛㩷㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㩷㪧㪦㪪㪠㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪚㪥㪎㪇㪉㪈㪍㪪㪬㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪝㪘㪥
㪙㪦㪯㩷㪝㪘㪥
㪜㫋㪿㪼㫉㫅㪼㫋
㪊㪇
㪚㪩㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪚㪪㪠㪚㪍
㪚㪥㪊㪇㪈㪪㪬㪙㪄㪙㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪚㪥㪊㪇㪇
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪚㪥㪏㪚㪥㪍㪚㪥㪌㪚㪥㪋㪚㪥㪉㪚㪥㪈㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪣㪦㪚㪢㩷㪪㪮㪠㪫㪚㪟
㪉㪊㪍㪍㪉
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪠㪥㪢㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㪐㪋
㪙㪦㪯
㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㪬㪩㪜㩷㪧㪝㩷
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪙㪦㪯㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㪬㪩㪜㩷㪚㪬㪫㪫㪜㪩㩷㪧㪝㩷
㪣㩷㪮㪘㪪㪫㪜㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩㪜㪥㪚㪦㪛㪜㪩
SC-T7000 series/SC-T5000 series/SC-T3000 series 㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
APPENDIX Block Wiring Diagram 327

6.1.2 Auto Take-up Reel
LED
㪚㫆㫅㫋㫉㫆㫃㩷㪧㪸㫅㪼㫃
CN2
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪪㫌㫇㫇㫃㫐㩷㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻
CN1
CN17 CN23 CN1

Auto Take-up Encoder
CN11
CN22
㪤㪸㫀㫅㩷㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻 Auto Take-up Motor
CN28 CN29
Slack Sensor
APPENDIX Block Wiring Diagram 328

6.2 Connection Diagram

 Front view (Right front)
4 5
APPENDIX Connection Diagram 329

Cable No. Connection

1 SUCTION FAN (Left) MAIN BOARD (CN23)
2 INTERLOCK SWITCH MAIN BOARD(CN20)
3 SUCTION FAN (Right) MAIN BOARD(CN22)
Relay Cable
4 R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR
(MAIN BOARD (CN14))
Relay Cable
5 CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR
(MAIN BOARD (CN14))
Relay Cable
6 CUTTER SENSOR
(MAIN BOARD (CN16))

 Front view (Left front)

1 L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR SUB-B BOARD (CN8)
2 CUTTER MOTOR SUB-B BOARD (CN4)

 Back view (Right rear) (1)
8
12
10
6 11 13
7
4 MAIN BOARD
Cable No. Connection Cable No. Connection

1 PANEL BOARD MAIN-C BOARD (CN4) Relay Cable
3 PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR
(MAIN BOARD (CN16))
2 PANEL BOARD MAIN BOARD(CN13)


4 APG MOTOR MAIN BOARD (CN15)
5 CR MOTOR MAIN BOARD (CN19)
Relay Cable
6 CR HP SENSOR
(MAIN BOARD (CN16))
Relay Cable
7 PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER)
(MAIN BOARD (CN17))
8 ATC MOTOR MAIN BOARD (CN15)
SUB-B BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN300)
PANEL BOARD MAIN-C BOARD (CN4)
Relay Cable
MAIN BOARD (CN16)
(CUTTER SENSOR)
9 Relay Cable
MAIN BOARD (CN17)
(PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER))
Relay Cable
MAIN BOARD (CN16)
(CR HP SENSOR)
Relay Cable
MAIN BOARD (CN16)
(PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR)
APG MOTOR MAIN BOARD (CN15)
ATC MOTOR MAIN BOARD (CN15)
Relay Cable
MAIN BOARD (CN23)
(SUCTION FAN (Left))
10 Relay Cable
MAIN BOARD (CN22)
(SUCTION FAN (Right))
INTERLOCK SWITCH MAIN BOARD (CN20)
Relay Cable (CR HP SENSOR) MAIN BOARD (CN16)
Relay Cable (CUTTER SENSOR) MAIN BOARD (CN16)
HEAD FFC MAIN BOARD (CN101/CN102)
11
CR FFC MAIN BOARD (CN100)
Relay Cable
12 MAIN BOARD (CN14)
(PUMP CAP UNIT / IC HOLDER)
SUB-B BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN301)
13
PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER) MAIN BOARD (CN21)


1 HEAD FFC MAIN BOARD (CN101/CN102)
2 CR FFC MAIN BOARD (CN100)
3 3 ATC MOTOR MAIN BOARD (CN15)

4 SUCTION FAN (Right) MAIN BOARD (CN22)
5 SUCTION FAN (Left) MAIN BOARD (CN23)
6 INTERLOCK SWITCH MAIN BOARD (CN20)
7 CR MOTOR MAIN BOARD (CN19)
17 12
8 APG MOTOR / ATC MOTOR MAIN BOARD (CN15)
9 SUB-B BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN300)
Relay Cable
11 (PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR,
16 10 MAIN BOARD (CN16)
CR HP SENSOR, CUTTER
15 7 SENSOR)
14 6 Relay Cable
11 MAIN BOARD (CN14)
(PUMP CAP UNIT, IC HOLDER)
1 10
13 Relay Cable
2 12 MAIN BOARD (CN16)
9 (PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER))
8 4 13 BOARD BOX FAN MAIN BOARD (CN24)
5 14 SUB-B BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN301)
15 PANEL BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN13)
16 CRCM BOARD (IC HOLDER) MAIN BOARD (CN400)
17 PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER) MAIN BOARD (CN21)
MAIN BOARD


1 PANEL BOARD MAIN-C BOARD (CN4)
2 MAIN-B BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN200)
3 MAIN-B BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN8)
4 MAIN-C BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN500)
5 MAIN-C BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN5)
6 PSH BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN1)
7 PSH BOARD AC Inlet
2
3
MAIN BOARD
4
MAIN-B BOARD
MAIN-C BOARD
7
PSH BOARD


Relay Cable
1 PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER)
(MAIN BOARD (CN17))
1 2


1 MAINTENANCE BOX HOLDER IC HOLDER
2 PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER) MAIN BOARD (CN21)

 Back view (Left rear)
1
9
8 7
2
SUB-B BOARD
5
3


3 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR SUB-B BOARD (CN5)
4 PF MOTOR SUB-B BOARD (CN1)
5 PF ENCODER SUB-B BOARD (CN2)
6 CUTTER MOTOR SUB-B BOARD (CN4)
7 L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR SUB-B BOARD (CN8)
8 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR SUB-B BOARD (CN6)
WASTE INK HOLDER
9 SUB-B BOARD (CN10)
ASSEMBLY

 PUMP CAP UNIT / IC HOLDER
3 1
2


PRESSURE MOTOR Relay Cable
1
(IC HOLDER) (MAIN BOARD (CN14))
INK LEVEL SENSOR Relay Cable
2
(IC HOLDER) (MAIN BOARD (CN14))
PRESSURE PUMP SENSOR Relay Cable
3
MOTOR(IC HOLDER) (MAIN BOARD (CN14))
MAINTENANCE POSITION Relay Cable
4
SENSOR (PUMP CAP UNIT) (MAIN BOARD (CN14))
PUMP MOTOR / PUMP MOTOR Relay Cable
5
ENCODER (PUMP CAP UNIT) (MAIN BOARD (CN14))

 CR UNIT (1)  CR UNIT (2)
SUB BOARD
2
1
SUB BOARD
Cable No. Connection Cable No. Connection

1 HEAD FFC MAIN BOARD (CN101/102) 1 IM SENSOR SUB BOARD (CN101)
2 CR FFC MAIN BOARD (CN100) 2 PW SENSOR SUB BOARD (CN103)

 CR UNIT (3)
SUB BOARD
1
2

1 CR ENCODER SUB BOARD (CN102)
2 PG SENSOR SUB BOARD (CN104)

6.3 Panel Menu Map
APPENDIX Panel Menu Map 344

User Menu Map
Print Queues Print Queue Job Detail
Print Queue Waiting Job Name Waiting Job Name
Hold Queue User:
: Default setting Saved Job Queue

Print Job Log Sheet
Hold Queue Estimated Start Time:
Estimated Print Time:
View Hold Queue
Resume All Jobs Printing Availability:
Saved Job Queue View Hold Queue Job Detail
Stored Job Name Paused Job Name Paused Job Name

User:
Job Detail Paper Type:
Paper Load/Remove Paper
Stored Job Name Source:
Load/Remove Paper Remove Paper
User: Size:
Select Paper Type Roll Paper
Length: Reason For Hold:
Custom Paper Setting Cut Sheet
Print Paper List Pages:
Poster Board
Paper Type:
Copies:
Select Paper Type
Source:
Photo Paper
Size:
Matte Paper
Estimated Print Time:
Plain Paper
Others
Custom Paper
Custom Paper Setting Select Reference Paper Paper Feed Adjust

Select Reference Paper Photo Paper Pattern
Platen Gap Matte Paper Value
Detect Paper Thickness Plain Paper
Paper Feed Adjust Others Paper Suction
Paper Suction No Paper Selected -4 - 0
Roll Paper Tension
Remove Skew Platen Gap Roll Paper Tension
Setting Name Narrow Normal
Restore Settings Standard High
Wide Extra High
Wider
Remove Skew
Maintenance Head Alignment Cutter Maintenance ON
Nozzle Check OFF

Auto(Uni-D) Adjust Cut Position
Head Cleaning Auto(Bi-D) Replace Cutter
TOP MENU Head Alignment Manual(Uni-D)
Print Queues Cutter Maintenance Manual(Bi-D)
Paper
Maintenance
Setup Printer Setup Roll Paper Setup Auto Cut
Setup
Printer Setup Roll Paper Setup Auto Cut ON
Enlarged Copy
Printer Status Advanced Settings Refresh Margin OFF
Network Setup Restore Settings Page Line
Power Settings Roll Paper Margin Refresh Margin
Preferences Roll Paper Remaining ON
Administrator Menu Remaining Alert OFF
Advanced Settings Page Line

Roll Paper Tension ON
Printer Status
Less Head Scuffing OFF
Firmware Version
Drying Time Per Page
Option Status
Paper Size Check Roll Paper Margin
Show Total Prints
Paper Skew Check Normal
Print Status Sheet
Store Held Job Top15mm/Bottom15mm
Top35mm/Bottom15mm
Restore Settings Top45mm/Bottom15mm
Yes 3mm
No 15mm
Network Setup IP Address Setting Roll Paper Remaining

IP Address Setting Auto ON
Print Status Sheet Panel OFF
Restore Settings
Restore Settings Roll Paper Remaining
Yes 1 - 15m
No
Roll Paper Tension
Power Settings Sleep Mode Low
Sleep Mode 5-180 min Normal
Power Off Timer High
Restore Settings Power Off Timer Extra High
OFF
1-24 hours Less Head Scuffing
ON
Restore Settings OFF
Yes
No Drying Time Per Page
0 - 60 min
Preferences Language
Language Paper Size Check
Unit: Length ON
Alert Lamp Setting OFF
Paper Skew Check

ON
OFF
Store Held Job

ON
Administrator Menu
Change Password OFF
Operational Control
Unit: Length
Power Cleaning
Manage HDD m
ft/in
Date And Time
Time Zone
Alert Lamp Setting
Reset All Settings
ON
OFF
Operational Control Network Setup

Network Setup Password Required
No Password Required
Enlarged Copy Color/B&W Saved Job Queue
Copies Format Hard Disk Format Hard Disk

Color
Color/B&W B&W Yes
Date And Time No
Auto
Quality MM/DD/YY HH:MM
Auto
Density A3->Auto
B4->Auto Reset All Settings
A4->Auto Yes
B5->Auto No
A5->Auto
LTR->Auto Border
4x6->Auto With Border
A4/2->Banner(Auto) Borderless
Other Size
Other Size Document Size Output Size

Document Size A3 A0
Output Size B4 US S
Border A4 B1
B5 A1
Quality A5 US D
Draft LTR B2
4x6 US C
Fine
A2
A0 (2Sheets)
Density
Light～Dark
Border
With Border
Borderless
SC-T7000 series/SC-T5000 series/SC-T3000 series

Serviceman Mode Menu Map
: Default setting
Mecha Adjustment RearAD

Paper [Enter] Start
RearAD
CR Un Cap
CR Un Cap
LCD RGB Check
SELF TESTING SELF TESTING [Enter] Un Cap
Panel Check
Mecha Adjustment Sensor Check
Life LCD RGB Check
Red
Green
Blue
Panel Check
Displays button name
Sensor Check
ILS
Life CR PG
CR PG PG--
PF H to F Speed PG-
RLS F to H Speed PGtyp
APG Page Size PG+
Cutter Fan PG++
Display Count Life Count
H to F Speed
400 CPS
500 CPS
240 CPS
F to H Speed
400 CPS
500 CPS
240 CPS
Page Size
0 - 1314 mm
Fan
0 - 200 %
Life Count
0 - 99999999
PF Feed Amount 1
Feed Amount 1 -1000.0 - 1000.0
Feed Speed 1 (0.1 )
Feed Amount 2
Feed Speed 2
Feed Speed 1
Wait
PS1
Fan
Life Count PS2
PS3
PS4
Feed Amount 2
-1000.0 - 1000.0
(0.1 )
Feed Speed 2
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
Wait
0.0 - 999.9 sec
Fan
0 - 200 %
Life Count
0 - 99999999
APG PG
PG PGtyp
Wait PG+
Life Count PG++
Wait
0.0 - 999.9 sec
Life Count
0 - 99999999
SC-T7000 series/SC-T5000 series/SC-T3000 series

6.4 Part names used in this manual Table 6-1. Conversion Table
Ref.
Part name used in this manual ASP part name
To make it easier to locate the target part from its part name, this manual uses the part (Ch3 sec.No.)
names different from the ASP part names. The table below shows the conversion of the  COVER,SIDE,RIGHT,UPPE
part names used in this manual and the corresponding ASP part names. RIGHT UPPER COVER R
3.4.2.9
& RIGHT ROLL COVER  CAP,CR,ADJUST
Table 6-1. Conversion Table  COVER,SIDE,ROLL,RIGHT
Ref. RIGHT LOWER COVER COVER,SIDE,RIGHT,LOWER 3.4.2.10
Part name used in this manual ASP part name
(Ch3 sec.No.) RIGHT BASE COVER COVER,BASE,RIGHT 3.4.2.11
 COVER,TOP,BASE,44 LEFT LOWER COVER COVER,SIDE,LEFT,LOWER 3.4.2.12
TOP COVER 3.4.2.1
 COVER,TOP,RIGHT REAR RIGHT LOWER
CAP,COVER,REAR 3.4.2.13
 COVER,FRONT,ASSY,ASP COVER
 COVER,FRONT,SUB,LEFT, UPPER LEFT COVER COVER,TOP,LEFT 3.4.2.14
44
LEFT UPPER COVER &  COVER,SIDE,LEFT,UPPER
 COVER,FRONT,SUB,RIGHT 3.4.2.15
LEFT ROLL COVER  COVER,SIDE,ROLL,LEFT
,44
 COVER,INNER Housing LEFT BASE COVER COVER,BASE,LEFT 3.4.2.16
FRONT COVER 3.4.2.2
 COVER,INNER,LEFT,44,AS FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER,FRONT,LEFT,LOWE
SY,ASP 3.4.2.17
COVER R
 COVER,INNER,RIGHT,44,A
REAR LEFT LOWER
SSY,ASP CAP,COVER,REAR 3.4.2.18
COVER
 COVER,FRONT,RIGHT
 COVER,FRONT,LEFT REAR ROLL COVER
N/A 3.4.2.19
FRAME
Housing PAPER GUIDE LOWER
LOWER PAPER GUIDE 3.4.2.3 CARTRIDGE COVER
ASSY.,ESL,ASP SENSOR ASSY.;C 3.4.2.20
SENSOR
LOWER PAPER GUIDE PAPER GUIDE
3.4.2.4 R WASTE INK COVER
B LOWER,B,ASSY.,ESL,ASP SENSOR ASSY. 3.4.2.21
SENSOR
 HOLDER,IH,ASSY,ASP
IH COVER 3.4.2.5 L WASTE INK COVER
 COVER,IH,ASSY,ASP SENSOR ASSY.;B 3.4.2.22
SENSOR
WASTE INK TANK
COVER,TANK,INK EJECT 3.4.2.6 INTERLOCK SWITCH INTER KOCK,ASSY.,ESL,ASP 3.4.2.23
COVER
MAIN BOARD BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 3.4.3.1
 COVER,PRINTER,SUB,LEF
T,44 MAIN-B BOARD BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 3.4.3.2
PRINTER COVER  COVER,PRINTER,SUB,RIG 3.4.2.7 MAIN-C BOARD BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 3.4.3.3
HT,44
SUB BOARD BOARD ASSY.,SUB 3.4.3.4
 COVER,PRINTER
Electric Circuit SUB-B BOARD BOARD ASSY.,SUB 3.4.3.5
UPPER SUPPORT R COVER,TOP,SUPPORT,RIGH Components
3.4.2.8 BOARD ASSY.,POWER
COVER T PSH BOARD 3.4.3.6
SUPPLY
 PANEL,ASSY.,ESL,ASP
PANEL BOARD  HOUSING,PANEL,LOWER, 3.4.3.7
ASSY,ASP
APPENDIX Part names used in this manual 347

Table 6-1. Conversion Table Table 6-1. Conversion Table

Ref. Ref.
Part name used in this manual ASP part name Part name used in this manual ASP part name
(Ch3 sec.No.) (Ch3 sec.No.)
CR COVER COVER,CR 3.4.4.1 PF MOTOR MOTOR ASSY.,PF 3.4.5.1
DAMPER KIT DUCT ASSY.,CR,ASP 3.4.4.2 PF SCALE SCALE,PF,UNIT,ESL,ASP 3.4.5.2
PRINT HEAD PRINT HEAD,IC856V 3.4.4.3 PF ENCODER BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER,PF 3.4.5.3
HEAD FFC HARNESS 3.4.4.4 PF TIMING BELT TIMING BELT,PF 3.4.5.4
CR FFC HARNESS 3.4.4.5 PRESSURE ROLLER N/A 3.4.5.5
SHEET ASSY PRESSURE ROLLER
SHEET,ASSY,44,ASP MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB 3.4.5.6
(SC-T7000 series) MOTOR
SHEET ASSY PRESSURE ROLLER
SHEET,ASSY,36,ASP 3.4.4.6 Paper Feed PHOTO INTERRUPTER 3.4.5.7
(SC-T5000 series) SENSOR
Mechanism
SHEET ASSY ATC MOTOR MOTOR ASSY.,REWIND 3.4.5.8
SHEET,ASSY,24,ASP
(SC-T3000 series)
PE SENSOR
PHOTO INTERRUPTER 3.4.5.9
Carriage Mechanism/ CR SCALE SCALE,CR,44;ASP 3.4.4.7 (ROLL PAPER)
Ink System
CR ENCODER BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER 3.4.4.8 PE SENSOR BOARD
Mechanism 3.4.5.10
CR TIMMING BELT TIMING BELT,CR,44 3.4.4.9 (THICK PAPER) ASSY.,DETECTOR,PW;B
PAPER THICKNESS
CR MOTOR MOTOR ASSY.,CR 3.4.4.10 PHOTO INTERRUPTER 3.4.5.11
SENSOR
CR HP SENSOR PHOTO INTERRUPTER 3.4.4.11
PF ROLLER MIDDLE
N/A 3.4.5.12
 MOTOR,APG,ASSY.,ESL,A SUPPORT
APG UNIT SP 3.4.4.12
Cutter Mechanism CUTTER UNIT CUTTER,44,ASSY.,ESL,ASP 3.4.6.1
 MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB
FAN
PG SENSOR PHOTO INTERRUPTER 3.4.4.13
BOARD BOX FAN ASSY.,ABSORPTION,ASSY.,E 3.4.7.1
PUMP CAP UNIT PUMP CAP ASSY,ASP 3.4.4.14 Fan SL,ASP
IC HOLDER HOLDER ASSY.,IC,ASP 3.4.4.15 SUCTION FAN DC FAN SET 3.4.7.2
INK TUBE TUBE,CR,44,ASSY.,ESL,ASP 3.4.4.16 TAKE-UP REEL
COVER,WINDER,DRIVE 3.4.8.1
COVER
CR UNIT CR,44,ASSY.,ESL,ASP 3.4.4.17
TAKE-UP REEL
Carriage Mechanism/ IM SENSOR BOARD ASSY.,INK MARK 3.4.4.18 DETECTOR,WINDER 3.4.8.2
SENSOR
Ink System BOARD
Mechanism PW SENSOR 3.4.4.19 TAKE-UP REEL LED INDICATOR,WINDER 3.4.8.3
ASSY.,DETECTOR,PW;B
TAKE-UP REEL
SW,WINDER 3.4.8.4
Auto Take-up Reel SWITCH
TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD ASSY.,POWER
3.4.8.5
BOARD SUPPLY
TAKE-UP REEL
MOTOR ASSY.,REWIND 3.4.8.6
MOTOR
TAKE-UP REEL MAIN
BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 3.4.8.7
BOARD
APPENDIX Part names used in this manual 348

6.5 Exploded Diagram/Parts List

For the exploded diagrams and parts list, refer to Service Parts Information.
APPENDIX Exploded Diagram/Parts List 349


SCT7000 Derniere PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SCT7000 Derniere PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SCT7000 Derniere PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

Large Format Color Inkjet Printer

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

Copyright © 2012 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

Revision Date of Issue Description

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

1.1 Product Description  Space saving design

 High print quality  Lower running cost

 For posters:  Independent ink cartridges for each color

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Description 13

1.2 Basic Specifications 1.2.2 Electric Specifications

Item Specification Rated voltage 100 to 240 VAC

Print method On-demand inkjet Input voltage range 90 to 264 VAC

*Nozzle set configuration is;

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 14

1.2.3 Ink Specifications

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 15

1.3 Printing Specifications

1.3.1 Paper Feed Specifications

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 16

1.3.2 Supported Media

Size Core Take-up*3

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 17

Size Core Take-up*3

420 (A2) --- -

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 18

Note "*1": SC-T3000 Series not supported

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 19

1.3.2.2 Usable Commercially Available Paper Size ROLL PAPER

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 20

Length 279.4 to 1,580 mm

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 21

1.3.3 Printable area Table 1-1. Roll Paper Margin

Table 1-1. Roll Paper Margin

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 22

1.3.4 Borderless Printing Specification Printer driver

Borderless The default printer driver setting is “Borderless”.

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 23

1.4 Hardware Specifications 1.4.2 Installation Room Requirement

1.4.1 Dimensions and Weight

Figure 1-2. SC-T3000 Series

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 24

1.4.3 Part Names Table 1-4. Front Side

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 25

ROLL PAPER ADAPTER

Figure 1-4. Roll paper adapter

Table 1-5. Roll paper adapter

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 26

1.5 Control Panel Specifications Table 1-6. Control panel

3 Load/Remove Paper button Displays the Load/Remove Paper menu.

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel Specifications 27

LCD Table 1-7. LCD